Introduction to CadnaA

The specifications and data given in this documentation are subject to modification without prior
notice. Unless otherwise stated, any names and data used in the examples are completely fictitious. No
part of this documentation may be reproduced or transmitted for whatever purpose, in any form or by
any means (electronically or mechanically), without the express permission in writing from DataKustik
GmbH.
Author: Dipl.-Ing. Heinrich A. Metzen
© DataKustik GmbH. All rights reserved.
Greifenberg, 2009
CadnaA is a registered trademark of Datakustik GmbH, Greifenberg, Germany
 Contents 3

Contents

Licence Agreement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 1 - Introduction
CadnaA - The leading software for calculating environmental noise . . . .13
Structure of CadnaA-documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Selecting Calculation Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
How to learn CadnaA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Chapter 2 - Installation
Installing Cadna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Aladdin HASP Admin Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA

The Main Window of CadnaA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Icon Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
CadnaA-Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Mouse Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Control Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Windows-Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Chapter 4 - Basics
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Insert Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Inserting Objects Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Inserting Objects via Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Editing Objects in the Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

4 Contents

Polygon Point Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Stretching Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Change Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Relocating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Rotating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Copying Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Inserting from the Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Deleting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Editing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Edit Object Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Dialog Options Name, ID, INFO, ObjectTree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Decimals in Edit Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Search for Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Scale & Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Synchronisation Graphics & Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation

Receiver Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Calculation of sound propagation according to ISO 9613-2 . . . . . 105
A-Weighted Sound Power Level as Emission Value . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Effect of Distance and Air Absorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Calculation Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Correcting for Operating Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Inserting an Area of Land Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Effect of Ground Absorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Directivity Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Different Emission Day/Evening/Night. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Screening Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Reflection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Partial Levels List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Spectrum as Emission Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Horizontal Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Specifications for Grid Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Grid Arithmetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Vertical Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Contents 5

Building Evaluation & Building Noise Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Building Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Automatically assigning Building Evaluation Symbols . . . . . . . . . .163
Result Table for the Building Noise Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources

Building Radiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Entering a Sound Radiating Facade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Entering a Strip Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Generate Radiating Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Internal Driveways and Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Directivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Pre-defined Directivities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
User-defined Directivities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Frequency Dependant Directivities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Radiation from Stacks and Chimneys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Radiation by the Stack’s Mouth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Radiation by the Stack’s Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Ground Absorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Meteorology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Correction based on C0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Correction based on Wind Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads

Entering Road Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Specifying Road Emission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Road with parallel Barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Elevated Roads and Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Wall Optimization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Pass-By Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways

Entering & editing of railroads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Creating & Addressing Lists with „Number of Trains“. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Railroads on Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

6 Contents

Chapter 9 - Data Import

Import & Calibration of Bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Importing Bitmap from GoogleEarth™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
DXF-Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
SHP-Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
ODBC-Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants

Structuring Data by Defining Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
ObjectTree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Managing Projects using Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Chapter 11 - Modify Objects

Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Modify Attribute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Duplicating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Force Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Force Right Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Object Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Modify Order of Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Simplify Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Break into pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Connect Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Convert to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Generate Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Generate Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Generate Building Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Generate Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Generate Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Parallel Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Swap Name/ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Delete Duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Contents 7

Fit DGM to Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427

Fit Object to DGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431

Chapter 12 - Context Menu

Edit Object Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Modify Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Cross Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
3D (Special). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Break Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Break Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Specify Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option BMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Option BPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Option XL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Option SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Option FLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Option APL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Option CALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Option 64-Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

8 Contents

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Licence Agreement 9

Licence Agreement

Important notice: Please carefully read this software licence agreement

before using the software. By installing the software, you agree to be
bound by the terms and conditions of this licence agreement. If you do not
agree to all of the terms and conditions of this licence agreement, you are
not allowed to use the software. In this case, please return the software
within one week to the place where you received it from and ask for refund
or credit.
1. SUBJECT MATTER OF THE AGREEMENT: DataKustik GmbH
grants the customer a non-exclusive right to use for the software
CadnaA. The property right and the copyright in the software do not
pass to the customer. The licence is issued for use on one single com-
puter workstation. For any further computer workstation, a separate
licence agreement will be required. The customer may only use the
software in the country in which it was purchased. Use of the soft-
ware in any other country requires prior express written permission
of DataKustik GmbH
2. COPY PROTECTION: CadnaA software is copy protected by a
dongle. This dongle represents the value of the program and cannot
be replaced free of charge, if lost.
3. COPY PROHIBITON: Neither the licensed software, nor the docu-
mentation, in whole or in parts, may be copied. The only exception to
this rule is the generation of a machine-readable copy of the software
for backup or archiving purposes. Any copy made by the customer
for these purposes must include all copyright or other proprietary
notices contained on the original.
4. ASSIGNMENT AND TRANSFER: The assignment to third parties
of rights and obligations arising out of this licence agreement, and the
transfer of the software for use is subject to prior express written per-

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

10 Licence Agreement

mission of DataKustik GmbH. In particular the customer may not

rent, lease, lend or sublicense the software without prior express writ-
ten permission of DataKustik GmbH.
5. USE OF TRADEMARKS: The customer is permitted to use the
trademarks and commercial names used by DataKustik GmbH to
identify printouts, provided that (a) these printouts were produced by
the licensed software using an electronic printing medium, (b) these
trademarks and commercial names are identified in the same way as
done by DataKustik GmbH, and (c) the customer stops using these
trademarks and commercial names upon termination of this licence
agreement.
6. PROHIBITION OF MODIFICATION: The customer may not
modify the licensed software in any way, or have it modified by third
parties. The customer may not decompile, reverse engineer, or disas-
semble the software or any part thereof.
7. UNAUTHORISED USE: The customer undertakes to ensure that his
employees and any other person subject to the customer's instruc-
tions, having access to the licensed software, comply with all obliga-
tions of safeguarding and the duty of care and diligence arising out of
this agreement. The customer furthermore undertakes to ensure that
no person gains access to the licensed software with the aim of deri-
ving the source code. If the customer becomes aware of any such per-
sons as indicated in the first sentence of this clause, using the
software in violation of the obligations of safeguarding and the duty
of care and diligence mentioned, he shall immediately take any pos-
sible action to prevent such use contrary to agreement. He shall
inform DataKustik GmbH in writing of any such use contrary to
agreement, should it continue nonetheless.
8. INDEMNITY: DataKustik GmbH is entitled to the protection rights
and the copyright in the licensed software. The customer can be held
liable by DataKustik GmbH for any violation of such protection
rights which he is answerable for.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Licence Agreement 11

9. WARRANTY: The customer recognises that errors in the programs

and the pertinent documentation cannot be excluded given the state
of the art. If, within 30 days from delivery to the customer, the custo-
mer asserts any deviation of the programs from the program specifi-
cations/description, he has the right to return the defective software
including the hardlock key to his supplier, and to demand delivery of
a new software version. If remedial measures cannot be taken, or fail,
the customer has the right to demand cancellation of the agreement.
In this case, the customer shall destroy any and all copies that he may
have generated. In states where national legislation requires a term of
notice of defect of more than 30 days, that legally provided term shall
be taken to apply, if the software is purchased and used there.
Any further warranty claims are expressly excluded. DataKustik
GmbH neither warrants that the program features satisfy the custo-
mer's requirements nor that they are compatible in the selection made
by the customer. Any liability for lost profit, for damage to or loss of
saved data, and for any other indirect or consequential damages is
also excluded, unless resulting from grossly negligent or wilful
action by DataKustik GmbH. Any warranty, liability or indemnity,
etc. Promised by a third party (eg. By a distribuor) to be granted by
DataKustik GmbH is not binding for DataKustik GmbH.
10. PROTECTION RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES: If the customer is
held liable by a third party because of an alleged violation of a patent
right, copyright, or any other protection right that said third party
may have in the licensed software, DataKustik GmbH shall immedia-
tely be informed in writing of the alleged violation of protection
rights, and DataKustik GmbH shall be supported sufficiently in any
lawsuit. If the customer is held liable by a third party in this way,
DataKustik GmbH has the right to choose, at its own discretion, to
either provide the customer with the appropriate licence by the third
party in question, to modify the licensed software, to supply the cus-
tomer with an equivalent different software, or to take back the
licensed software, in which case the licence fees shall be fully reim-
bursed to the customer. DataKustik GmbH is not liable for violations

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

12 Licence Agreement

of protection rights which are due to the fact that the customer altered
or modified the licensed software to suit his needs, or that the
licensed software is used or sold in combination with other software,
hardware or consumables not supplied by DataKustik GmbH. This
material liability is the total of any liability assumed by DataKustik
GmbH for violations of any patent right, trademark right, copyright
or other intangible property rights.
11. SOFTWARE UPDATES: DataKustik GmbH reserves the right to
supply to the customer the most recent version of the licensed soft-
ware. DataKustik GmbH reserves the right to charge the customer
with additional licence fees for such updated versions, and the custo-
mer has the right to decline acceptance of such deliveries.
12. LEGAL INVALIDITY OF CONTRACTUAL PROVISIONS:
Should single or several provisions of this agreement be or become
invalid, this shall not affect the effectiveness of the remaining provi-
sions of the agreement. The invalid provision(s) will then have to be
re-interpreted or supplemented in such a way that the originally
intended commercial purpose is lawfully achieved.
CadnaA is a registered trademark of DataKustik GmbH, Germany.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 1 - Introduction 13

Chapter 1 - Introduction

1.1 CadnaA - The leading software for

calculating environmental noise
CadnaA is a software program for the calculation and the assessment of
noise and air pollution. The program fulfills the requirements for professi-
onal experts.
The software calculates and predicts the noise immission in the neighbor-
hood of:
• commercial and industrial sites,
• sports and leisure facilities,
and of traffic systems like
• road and railways,
• airports and landing strips, or
• any other noisy facilities.
CadnaA is suitable for noise prediction in local studies as well as for de-
tailed analyses of mapping noise scenarios in large cities (option CadnaA-
XL). Powerful features include incredible screen displays, handling and
output of graphical grids and the use of scanned bitmap plans (option
CadnaA-BMP). CadnaA enables automatic optimization of barriers and
the automatic allocation of noise quota (option CadnaA-BPL). Aircraft
noise in the vicinity of airports, landing strips and related facilities is cal-
culated with the additional option CadnaA-FLG.
The option CadnaA-APL („Air Pollution“) extends the range of
application to the calculation, the assessment, and the presentation of air
pollutants distribution.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

14 Chapter 1 - Introduction

Basic to all, CadnaA has the ability to import and export data from and to
third-party software programs (e.g. ArcView, MapInfo, DXF, or from
databases via the ODBC-interface).
The sound level during pass-by’s with time history and auralisation of
moving sources, the different 3D-views of your project when moving
through, the PCSP (Program Controlled Segmented Processing) to
accelerate calculation of large projects, the groups and variants, and result
table are just some highlights of CadnaA.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 1 - Introduction
Structure of CadnaA-documentation 1.2 15

1.2 Structure of CadnaA-documentation

The full range of documentation provided with the CadnaA-program con-
sists of the following parts:

Document Contents

Introduction to CadnaA installation, editing of objects,

(present manual) modes of calculation, modeling
industrial, road, and railway noise,
basic import features & grouping
concept, Modify Objects & context
menu actions/commands, CadnaA-
options

CadnaA-reference manual detailed description of all dialogs

and their options (sources, obstac-
les, topography, immission), confi-
guration dialog, import/export,
graphics/bitmaps, tables & libraries,
project organization

CadnaA-manual „Attributes, listings of object attributes, variab-

Variables, and Keywords“ les & keywords, handling of string
operations, operators & functions,
protocol abbreviations

Structure of this manual

The present introductory manual provides in chapters 1 and 2 basic infor-
mation on the CadnaA-software and describes the installation procedure
for local and server-installations.
In chapters 3 to 5 the basics on how to enter objects and the steps to per-
form calculations for all noise types are explained.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

16
1.2 Chapter 1 - Introduction
Structure of CadnaA-documentation

In chapters 6 to 8 you will find explanations for all noise types (industrial,
road, and railway) on an introductory level. This is achieved using examp-
les with sequences of actions to take.
Chapters 9 and 10 cover comprehensive subjects like data import and the
grouping concept in CadnaA. Also this is explained on an introductory le-
vel to enabling progress and results also for beginners.
The chapters 11 and 12 list and describe all commands which are available
on the CadnaA-specific dialog Modify Objects and on the object-specific
context menus.
Chapter 13 introduces into the features of the CadnaA-options.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 1 - Introduction
Selecting Calculation Standards 1.3 17

1.3 Selecting Calculation Standards

By selecting a desired country from the drop-down menu Calculati-
on|Configuration|Tab Country the software will be configured to the
corresponding standards for calculation of industry, road and railways.
The choice will depend on options purchased.
Standards and guidelines, however, do not describe all possible situations
or scenarios, so that the range of application being covered originally had
to be extended in many cases.
• In all cases the user of the software is responsible for the interpreta-
tion and results of the calculation and analysis. We cannot take the lia-
bility for false calculation and its consequences which are caused by
improper inputs and system configuration. The licence agreement,
which is accessible also in the online help with the same-named key-
word, will be accepted with program use.
• Not all data or values can be adapted afterwards automatically accor-
ding to the subsequently selected standards if you switch the standards
after the parameters of sources have been entered. If necessary you
must check and adapt the data yourself. For example, if you first
choose the German standards, input the train classes to evaluate the
emission level and afterwards switch to the French standards you may
produce a false emission level for the French standard because France
may not have the same train classes and penalties.
The correct calculation will be proved with the „official“ available test Test Cases 1.3.0
task. The „official test task“ is unambiguously defined test cases from au-
thorized institutions. For the time being the following proofs have been
made:
• the „Test Tasks for the checking of calculation programs according to
the guidelines for Noise Abatement on Roads - Test 94“ by the Federal
Ministry for Traffic, Germany.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

18
1.3 Chapter 1 - Introduction
Selecting Calculation Standards

• the Draft of „Test Tasks for the checking of calculation programs

according to the guidelines for Calculation of sound immission of rail-
ways - Test-Schall 03 - 95“ by Deutsche Bahn AG, Akustik 03.1, Sta-
tus Feb. 1996
• the „Test Tasks for the checking of calculation programs according to
the appendix to the Magnet Hoover Train-Noise Abatement enactment
- Test-Transrapid - Akustik 03.2“ Status Januar 1997
• Comparative Calculation and Certification correspondig with a test air-
port of the German Federal Environmental Office Berlin
• the test examples, in the appendix of the RVS 3.02 „Lärmschutz“, per
letter of the Federal Minister for Economic Affairs on August 13th
1998 (Austria).
The future published test task according to DIN 45687 /48/ is also taken
into account to ensure the correct calculation of CadnaA. If necessary ple-
ase ask for the current status.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 1 - Introduction
System Requirements 1.4 19

1.4 System Requirements

This paragraph list the minimum and recommended requirements to run
CadnaA with version 32-bit and 64-bit. The figures in brackets refer to the
remarks at the end of this listing.
• Intel Pentium III or AMD Athlon processor Minimum require-
• 256 MB RAM [3] ments for CadnaA
• 100 MB free disk space for the software installation 32-bit
• 1 GB free disk space for project files [2]
• OpenGL graphics board with minimum 64 MB graphic memory (no
shared memory) [1]
• operating system Microsoft Windows 2000 [5][6]

• Intel Core 2 or AMD Phenom or AMD Athlon 64 multi-core-CPU Recommended

• 2 GB RAM [3] requirements for
• 100 MB free disk space for the software installation CadnaA 32-bit
• 10 GB free disk space for project files [2]
• OpenGL graphics board with minimum 256 MB graphic memory (no
shared memory) [1]
• operating system Microsoft Windows XP [5][6]

• Intel Core 2 or AMD Phenom or AMD Athlon 64 processor with 64-bit Minimum require-
extension ments for CadnaA
• 2 GB RAM [3] 64-bit
• 100 MB free disk space for the software installation
• 1 GB free disk space for project files [2]
• OpenGL graphics board with minimum 64 MB graphic memory (no
shared memory) [1]
• 64-bit operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64-Edi-
tion or Windows Vista 64-bit [4]

• Intel Core 2 or AMD Phenom or AMD Athlon 64 multi-core-CPU with Recommended

64-bit extension requirements for
• 4 GB RAM or more [3] CadnaA 64-bit

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

20
1.4 Chapter 1 - Introduction
System Requirements

• 100 MB free disk space for the software installation

• 50 GB free disk space for project files [2]
• OpenGL graphics board with minimum 256 MB graphic memory (no
shared memory) [1]
• 64-bit operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64-Edi-
tion or Windows Vista 64-bit [4]

Remarks • Remark 1: Using the 3D-special view in CadnaA requires an OpenGL

graphics board. The amount of memory required depends on the pro-
ject size. Using shared memory may cause graphical display errors.
• Remark 2: The amount of disk space required depends on the number
and size of the projects.
• Remark 3: The amount of RAM required depends on the number and
size of the actual project.
• Remark 4: For CadnaA (64-bit) a 64-bit operating system is mandatory
as well as a processor with 64 bit-extension. Supported operating sys-
tems are: Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64-Edition, Windows
Vista 64-bit
• Remark 5: CadnaA (32-bit) can be installed and run on a 64-bit opera-
ting system. When using a 64-bit operating system, however, more sys-
tem resources are required. Supported operating systems are: Microsoft
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows XP Professio-
nal x64-Edition, Windows Vista 64-bit.
• Remark 6: When using a Microsoft Windows Vista operating system
more system resources are required in general. This requires at least 1
GB of RAM.

Multiple Monitors CadnaA supports multiple monitors.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 1 - Introduction
How to learn CadnaA 1.5 21

1.5 How to learn CadnaA

The introductory manual describes the installation of CadnaA and all fea-
tures on the beginner’s level without replacing the thorough study of the
reference-manual.

In order to become familair with the new features of the present CadnaA- CadnaA for experi-
release, we recommend you study the chapter 1.5 New Features of Cad- enced users 1.5.0
naA 4.0 with its cross-references in the CadnaA reference manual. Alter-
natively, you can open the corresponding pdf file on the CadnaA CD-
ROM using Adobe® Reader® clicking on the hyperlinks to navigate to the
respective chapters.

In this introductory manual all features for entering and editing of objects CadnaA for begin-
are described, as well as all modes of calculation (receiver point, horizon- ners 1.5.0
tal & vertical grid, building evaluation). Furthermore, you will find soluti-
ons and hints for tasks relevant to the noise types industry, road, and
railroad.
The documentation assumes that you are familiar with the Microsoft®
Windows® operating system, with mouse operations and general PC-
handling. In case this does not apply, please refer to the according Micro-
soft®-manuals or the Windows®-online-help.
To get to know CadnaA we suggest you - after installation - to study at
least the following chapters in this introductory manual:
• chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA:
This chapter explains the main window of CadnaA and its symbols.
• chapter 4 - Basics:
This chapter describes how to enter objects using the mouse or the key-
board.
• chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation:
Within this chapter all CadnaA-modes of calculation (receiver point,
horizontal & vertical grid, building evaluation) are explained with
examples.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

22
1.5 Chapter 1 - Introduction
How to learn CadnaA

• chapters 6 to 8 - Modelling industrial, road, and railroad sources:

These chapters treat noise type relevant tasks which are explained step-
by-step in examples.
• Chapters 9 and 10 cover the import features to import geometrical and
noise-type specific data from other file types and the group concept of
CadnaA.
When having studied this intorductory manual you will have gathered in-
formation on the main features of CadnaA.

Dialog Modify All actions on the dialog Modify Objects and the context menu of objects
Objects & are described in chapters 12 and 13. Explanations of the terms used in the
Context Menu CadnaA-dialogs can be found in the WINDOWS-online help or in the in-
Commands 1.5.0 dex of the reference manual. Should that not be the case we would be glad
to hear from you. We pride ourselves on making your introduction to, and
used of, CadnaA easy and enjoyable.

CadnaA-Options 1.5.0 This introductory manual closes with chapter 13 describing the most pro-
minent features of all presently available program extensions.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 2 - Installation 23

Chapter 2 - Installation

2.1 Installing CadnaA

In order to install CadnaA proceed as follows: Installing CadnaA
• Start your PC running one of the Microsoft-operating systems
Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Vista.
• Login as an administrator. Restart the operating system if required.
• Prior to the installation, close all other running software programs (e.g.
virus scanners).
• Insert the CadnaA-CD into your CD-drive (e.g. drive D:).
• The installation procedure starts automatically. If not, double-click the
setup.exe on the CadnaA-CD.
• Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
After completion of the installation, the CadnaA-program link is located
on the Windows-StartUp-menu on Program Files\Datakustik\CadnaA.

* The software CadnaA cannot be run from CD.

CadnaA is copy-protected by a HASP-SRM-dongle. You need to install Installing the HASP-

the dongle-driver to properly use the software. Proceed as follows: SRM-dongle driver

• Change to the drive with the CadnaA-CD (e. g. D:) and open the
directory Support\HASP.
• Run the file HASPUserSetup.exe. The dongle driver is now being
installed.
• When the driver-installation is completed connect the HASP-SRM-
dongle to a free USB-port.
The installation is now completed.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

24 Chapter 2 - Installation

* In order to use a network-dongle the dongle-driver has to be installed

on all local client-PCs and on the server-PC as well.
Remark on updates When receiving updated versions of CadnaA you may overwrite the
version already installed or you may install it to a different directory. An
update is always a full version, therefore, the former version is not re-
quired.

* Please consider that files created by a newer version of CadnaA may

not be opened correctly with a former version. Thus, some objects
may not be displayed when opening those files with a former version.
We guarantee the downward compatibility of files (i.e. files may be
opened with newer, but not necessarily with older versions of Cad-
naA).

INI-files INI-files are used with software programs to save user-defined settings and
other parameters. It is placed in the Windows directory. From these files
the different settings are loaded when starting the software. CadnaA can
use several of such INI files, each having different settings.
Most suitable is to start CadnaA and do all the desired settings like e.g. po-
sition and size of the CadnaA main window by dragging it on the desired
position and pulling it on the required size. When CadnaA is closed all
settings are saved in the CADNAA.INI-file.
Rename the default file (C:\WINDOWS\CADNAA.INI) or copy and rena-
me it to, for example, „CNA1.INI“. Now, enter this name in the command
line of your program link on the desktop, e.g.:
„C:\Program Files\Datakustik\CadnaA\cna32.exe“ /ini=CNA1.INI
This links to the file „CNA1.INI“ in the Windows-directory whereas the
command line:
„C:\Program Files\Datakustik\CadnaA\cna32.exe“ /ini=C:\data\CNA2.INI
links to the file „CNA2.INI“ in directory „C:\data“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 2 - Installation 25

The language setting of the user-interface, however, is not saved in the

INI-file. An additional command has to be entered to the command line,
for example /lang=eng. This command will start CadnaA always with the
English front-end (as long as this language is coded on the dongle).
Example:
„C:\Program Files\Datakustik\CadnaA\cna32.exe /lang=eng“ /ini=CNA2.INI

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

26 Chapter 2 - Installation

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 2 - Installation
Aladdin HASP Admin Control Center 2.2 27

2.2 Aladdin HASP Admin Control Center

The Aladdin HASP Admin Control Center is installed parallel to the

HASP-SRM-dongle-driver automatically. The HASP Admin Control
Center is used for diagnosis in case of dongle-access problems (e.g. local-
ly or within a network) or when recoding the dongle-configuration.
A recoding of the dongle-configuration is required when a single or Recoding
several CadnaA-options, further standards, or objects shall be enabled. In the Dongle-
those cases you will receive a new dongle-configuration file from Configuration
DataKustik having a file extension *.v2c („vendor-to-customer“). This
configuration file is attached using the Aladdin HASP Admin Control
Center in order to recode the HASP-SRM-dongle.
Proceed as follows:
• Quit all processes (i.e. main dialogs) of CadnaA on your PC.

* When recoding a HASP-SRM-network dongle all processes attached

to this network dongle of CadnaA on all client-PCs must be closed.
• Ensure that the HASP-SRM-dongle to be recoded is attached to a free
USB-port of the PC presently in use.

* To recode a HASP-SRM-network dongle detach it from the server-

PC and connect to the PC presently in use.
• Start the software on the WINDOWS-StartUp-menu on Program
Files\Datakustik\CadnaA\HASP Admin Control Center.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

28
2.2 Chapter 2 - Installation
Aladdin HASP Admin Control Center

The HASP Admin Control Center is displayed in your web-browser.

• Click in the menu „Administration Options“ (on the left) the item
„HASP Keys“ to display all attached dongles in a list.

All locally attached, as well as - if available - all network dongles on the

network are displayed in the table.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 2 - Installation
Aladdin HASP Admin Control Center 2.2 29

• Now, click in the menu „Administration Options“ the item „Update/

Attach“.

• Select the V2C-file sent by DataKustik using the button „Search“.

• When the file has been selected click on button „Apply File“ in order
to start the coding procedure.
Upon termination of the coding procedure a message is displayed.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

30
2.2 Chapter 2 - Installation
Aladdin HASP Admin Control Center

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 2 - Installation
Select Language 2.3 31

2.3 Select Language

CadnaA is multi-lingual. For the time being, you may operate the softwa-
re in any of the following languages:
• German,
• English,
• French,
• Italian,
• Polish,
• Slowak,
• Spanish,
• Czech.
The available languages are displayed on the menu Option|Language.
The language option depends also on the level you have purchased. For
the time being, manuals and online help are only available in German and
English.
When CadnaA is started, it automatically selects the language correspon-
ding to the country setting in the Windows system. This setting is also the
default setting for CadnaA. If a language not available in CadnaA is re-
quired, the program will be started in English.

In Options|Language, click the language in which you wish to run Change Language
CadnaA. Then terminate the program and start CadnaA again. The selec-
tion of language is active now.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

32
2.3 Chapter 2 - Installation
Select Language

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA 33

Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA

In CadnaA, selecting some menu items causes functions to be executed

immediately while selecting other menu items opens a dialog.
When you choose an item followed by ellipses (...) a dialog appears.
When a keyboard-shortcut is shwon next to a menu command this can be
used to select the respective command without opening the menu.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

34 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA 35

3.1 The Main Window of CadnaA

Double-clicking the program icon on the Windows-desktop or an alternati- Starting CadnaA
ve click on the link on the Start-menu in Programs/Datakustik/CadnaA
of MS-Windows 2000, Windows YXP or VISTA starts CadnaA and the
main window opens.
Main Window

On the main window, all objects can be entered and edited using mouse, Parallel working
keyboard, and digitizer in parallel. Inserting an object at the same time cre- with mouse, key-
ates a new data record in the pertinent object list (Tables menu). board or
digitizer
Dialogs, edit dialogs, and also the toolbox can be re-arranged on the desk-
top by positioning the mouse pointer on the upper edge of the box while
pressing the right mouse button. Now drag the box to the desired position
with the mouse button held down.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

36 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA

Icons CadnaA features icons, so-called shortcuts, which, when being clicked,
immediately trigger the function they represent.
For most icons, the pertinent function is indicated on the status bar in the
lower-left corner of the CadnaA main window as long as the mouse poin-
ter is positioned on that icon with the left mouse button held down (see
also Help text under Show Icon Bar).
For users yet unfamiliar with handling menus, dialogs, scroll bars, or sys-
tem menus, it is recommended you go through the respective chapters in
the Windows manual.
Status Bar The status bar runs horizontally along the bottom of the CadnaA main
window.

If, with the left mouse button held down, the mouse pointer is positioned
on an icon from the icon bar or from the toolbox, information about the
pertinent function will appear on the left side of the status bar.
As the mouse pointer is moved across the screen, the right site on the sta-
tus bar will show the coordinates and, after a calculation, also the levels
(L) calculated and, if applicable, also the ground hight (G), for that point
which the mouse pointer is currently positioned on.
The status bar can be turned on and off via the Options menu by clicking
the menu item Show Status Bar.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Icon Bar 3.2 37

3.2 Icon Bar

The icon bar can be turned on and off by clicking Options|Show Icon
Bar. Following icons are available:

Scale list box to set the desired scale by selection from the list or by ente-
ring a user-defined value. To select a scale, click the arrow.

Listbox to select and to display an existing variant

Listbox to choose an evaluation parameter which has

been defined before in menu Calculation|Configura-
tion

Opens an existing file

Save file

Print graphic

Exports according to the present export settings into a file

Copies contents, Section or selected object from the CadnaA

main window to the clipboard

Triggers calculation according to specified configuration for

specified receiver points (for calculation of the grid select the
command Calc Grid from the Grid menu)

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

38
3.2 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Icon Bar

Menu calibrated digitizer

Fix objects

Display Bitmap

Help-Cursor for topic related help

Opens online help menu

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
CadnaA-Toolbox 3.3 39

3.3 CadnaA-Toolbox
The toolbox is part of the CadnaA main window and contains the icons re-
presenting the different object types. It can be re-arranged on the desktop
as you like. To this end, click its upper border with the left mouse button
and hold the button depressed while moving the mouse to a different posi-
tion on the window. When you have reached the desired position, release
the mouse button.
An object type is activated by clicking the desired icon, or, if available, by Select Object Type3.3
pressing the pertinent hotkey, i. e. the CTRL key plus the respective letter
key at the same time.

Toolbox

Instead of activating a feature by clicking the pertinent icon, some icons Toolbox Icons
can also be accessed via hotkeys. In this case, you have to press the CONT-
ROL KEY, designated Ctrl or Strg depending on the keyboard used, plus the
respective letter key at the same time. If such a hotkey exists, it is indica-
ted below the icon it belongs to.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

40
3.3 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
CadnaA-Toolbox

(3) (1) (1)

Edit Mode Zoom + Zoom - Zoom all

(CTRL+e)

(1) (2) (2) (2)

Point Source Line Source Area Source Vertical Area

(CTRL+q) (CTRL+l) (CTRL+f) Source

(2) (1) (2) (2)

Road Crossing with Traffic Parking Lot Railway

(CTRL+s) Lights (CTRL+a) (CTRL+p) (CTRL+b)

(2)
(1) (2) (1) + (2)

Tennis, Point Optimisable Area Power Plant 3D-Reflector

of Service Source Source

(2) (2) (2) (2)

Building Barrier (CTRL+w) Bridge Ground

(CTRL+h) Absorption

(2) (2) (2) (2)

Built-up Area Foliage Contour Line Fault Line

(4) (2) (2) (1)

Cylinder 3D-Reflector Embankment Height Point

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
CadnaA-Toolbox 3.3 41

(1) (1) (2) (2)

Receiver Point Building Evaluation Calculation Area Vertical Grid

(CTRL+i)

(2)

Designated
Land Use

(3) (1) (3) (3)

Bitmap Level Box Text Box Section

(2) (3) (1)

Auxiliary Polygon Symbol Station Mark

* Note: The numbers in brackets indicate which method of positioning

the object is used (see Online help, keyword: Inserting objects).

By clicking onto an object typ icon while holding the ALT-key depressed Open Object Table3.3
the respective object table from the Tables menu is displayed.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

42
3.3 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
CadnaA-Toolbox

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Keyboard 3.4 43

3.4 Keyboard
By means of the identification letters (underlined letters), you can call
CadnaA menu items from the keyboard as follows: Hold ALT key down,
type identification letter of the menu in question, release ALT key, and
then type only the identification letter of the desired command. If, for ex-
ample, you wish to select the Save command, press ALT+f at the same
time (File menu opens), release both keys, and then type s for Save (docu-
ment is saved).
But it is not only menu items that can be accessed from the keyboard. The-
re are also some frequently used icons in the toolbox which can be activa-
ted by using a hotkey. To this end, hold down the control (CTRJL) key and
type the respective letter.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

44
3.4 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Keyboard

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Mouse Buttons 3.5 45

3.5 Mouse Buttons

"Click" means to press and release a mouse button once. "Double-click"
means to rapidly press and release the left mouse button twice.

To select an option, execute a command, select an object, or activate an Click with Left
object icon, place the mouse pointer on that option, icon, command, or, in Mouse Button
the graphic representation, on the border or the centreline of an object or
line object and click the mouse button.
Unless you are instructed otherwise, mouse actions always refer to the left
button. If you are left-handed, or the mouse was configured differently, use
the appropriate button instead.

CadnaA features dialogs with lists where you can highlight and select se- Multiple Selections
veral rows at the same time.
Click the desired row using the left mouse button. Clicking a different row Selecting one row
deselects the one selected before.
Click the first row using the left mouse button, press and hold down Selecting several
SHIFT while clicking the last row to be selected. All rows lying in bet- consecutive rows
ween are highlighted and selected as well.
Press and hold down the CTRL key while clicking the desired rows. Selecting several
rows in an arbitrary
sequence

Double-clicking an existing object or a data record in a table opens the Double-click with
pertinent Edit Object dialog where you can enter the relevant parameters. Left Mouse Button

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

46
3.5 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Mouse Buttons

Click with Right Clicking with the right mouse button means to rapidly press and release
Mouse Button the right mouse button. Depending on which mode you are working in,
using the right mouse button has two different effects.

* When using the mouse to insert an object in the CadnaA main win-
dow, clicking with the right mouse button
- terminates the insertion mode for the object presently entered and
- again with a subsequent click with the Right mouse key on the
object the edit dialog opens.
* In the edit mode when the right mouse button is used to click on an
existing object or a data record in a table, a context menu appears (for
more information see online help keyword: context menu).

Context menu opened (here with object „Building“)

Wheelmouse With a wheel mouse the wheel may be used to zoom in and out of the gra-
phics quickly.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Control Elements 3.6 47

3.6 Control Elements

Option Button 3.6.0

Option buttons are control elements indicating whether a condition is true

or false. If true = yes, a black dot appears in the option button. The mouse
pointer is used for activation/deactivation. Within one set of options, only
one option can be active at one time.

Check Box 3.6.0

Check boxes are control elements indicating whether a condition is true or

false. When the check box is activated, an X or ü appears in the square, in-
dicating that the condition is true (active). Otherwise, the condition is false
(inactive).

List Box/
Combo box 3.6.0

A list box contains a list of data of which only one value can apply. The
value selected will be displayed in the list box, and the selected option is
thus activated. In combobox, you can either select a value or enter a user-
defined one.
To make the list drop down, click the arrow to the right of the box.
In some cases, like in the example above, you will find an option button
next to the list box. Click this first to activate the list box.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

48
3.6 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Control Elements

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Save Settings 3.7 49

3.7 Save Settings

If Options|Save Settings is clicked in the current version, the following
settings will be saved for later sessions of CadnaA:
• options for the exporting of DXF-files,
• printing options as well as header/footer entries for the printed reports,
• showing or hiding of icon and status bar.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

50
3.7 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Save Settings

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Windows-Help 3.8 51

3.8 Windows-Help

While you are working with CadnaA, Help is always just one click away. Online Help System
To call for the Help:
• Press key F1 (or click the Help icon on the icon bar), or

• Click the Help cursor on the icon bar: The mouse pointer turns into the
Help pointer icon. Now click any menu item, or
• On any dialog box, click the command button “Help”.

1. In the help menu, select the Search command (or click the “Search” Finding a Topic in
register in the online help). CadnaA opens the Search dialog box. the Online Help
System
2. Enter the first letter of the topic to be found. During the entry, new
index items are displayed in the list box.
3. Double-click that index item which corresponds to the desired topic
(or select the index item and press the RETURN-key). The online
help displays further topics, if any, referring to this index item.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

52
3.8 Chapter 3 - Working with CadnaA
Windows-Help

Please refer to the WINDOWS-documentation for further information or,

in CadnaA, select the Use Help option on the HELP menu.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics 53

Chapter 4 - Basics

4.1 Files
In CadnaA all files have the extension CNA, which need not be entered
when saving a file, but is appended to the file name automatically. The im-
port feature (see there) allows you to also insert your own Cadna-CNA
files.

Activating the New command on the File menu opens a new, "blank" file File|New 4.1
where you can enter objects. If a file has already been opened and edited,
but the modifications have not yet been saved, a safety check dialog ap-
pears which allows you to save the active file.

When this command on the File menu is clicked, the currently active file Save 4.1
is saved (including any modifications) under its existing name. If the file
in question is new and has not been saved before, the "Save As" dialog
opens.

With the File|Save As command, the file in process can be assigned a Save As 4.1
name and then be saved under that name. If the new file name already
exists, a safety check dialog appears allowing you to cancel the Save pro-
cedure.
Clicking „Yes“ will overwrite the existing file. Clicking „No“ cancels the
Save procedure in which case the active file must be saved under a diffe-
rent name that does not yet exist.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

54 Chapter 4 - Basics

Exit 4.1 Select the File|Exit command to exit CadnaA. If the active file has been
edited but not yet been saved, a dialog appears allowing you to save this
file prior to exiting the program.

Lock Files 4.1 An opened file in CadnaA can be locked. In this case you cannot saving it
with the same name. To do this you just have to select Lock on the menu
File.
Each time you intend to save this file with the same name, a dialog with
refering to the locking of the file will open. In this case you can reverse the
lock by clicking „Yes“, or cancel by clicking „No“. A locked file can only
be saved with a different name.
If you have activated the Auto-Save feature on the menu Options|Auto-
Save the dialog would open if you have entered the name of the locked file
as an auto-save-file. Enter a different file name to auto-save your file, if
necessary.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Insert Objects 4.2 55

4.2 Insert Objects

All graphical elements available on the CADNA A main window are called
objects. They can be inserted in different ways:
• using the mouse (see Chapter 4.2.1)
• from the keyboard (see Chapter 4.2.2
• via tables (see Chapter 11.2)
• by digitizing (see Chapter 8.2)
• by importing (see Chapter ) and
• single objects also via the Windows clipboard (see Chapter 4.3.7).
When inserting objects, you can always use mouse, keyboard, and digiti-
zer (if configured) simultaneously. You do not need to switch between tho-
se modi.
To position an object, first activate the desired object icon on the toolbox
either by clicking it with the mouse or by pressing the respective hotkey
(see Chapter 3.3). Under the insertion mode, the icon just clicked then
sticks to the mouse cursor.

Now you can insert the object selected in the CadnaA main window either
by pressing the mouse button and/or pulling the mouse or via keyboard
when entering the coordinates. At the same time, this will generate a data
record on the pertinent object table (Tables menu).

An insertion procedure is terminated by either Terminate

Insertion 4.2
• pressing the RIGHT mouse button, or
• pressing RETURN, or
• changing to a different object type by clicking the respective icon on
the toolbox or by pressing the pertinent hotkey, or
• changing to the Edit mode by clicking the respective icon or pressing
CTRL+E.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

56
4.2 Chapter 4 - Basics
Insert Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Inserting Objects Using the Mouse 4.2.1 57

4.2.1 Inserting Objects Using the Mouse

There are 4 different ways of positioning or inserting objects using the

mouse, depending on which object or toolbox icon was selected. (see
Chapter 3.3).

(e. g. point source, receiver point, level box) Positioning Method

1: Insertion of
Position the object at the desired location on the CadnaA main window by
Points 4.2.1
clicking with the left mouse button. Each click will insert one object in the
window, and generate the pertinent data record on the respective object ta-
ble.

(e. g. line sources, roads, railways, barriers, buildings, areas) Positioning Method
2: Polygons and
To insert lines or polygon lines and polygons, activate the respective icon,
Lines 4.2.1
then point to the desired starting point of the line or the desired first corner
of the polygon, and click. By this click, the first polygon point has been in-
serted. The mouse pointer now pulls a "rubber band" line from that point
to any location the mouse is moved to. Pressing the mouse button again
defines the second polygon point. Press the left mouse button at every
point where the polygon line changes its direction. Each of these clicks
will insert a further polygon point which can be edited or deleted after-
wards.
As soon as the line or the polygon has the desired length or dimensions,
terminate the insertion procedure. In the case of polygons, the last point in-
serted is then connected to the starting point to give a closed polygon line.
Open or closed polygons may have arbitrary shapes. If you want to force a Right Angle
right angle press the SHIFT key while moving the mouse. In this case you
can only move rectangularly after a click.

* If you want to produce a closed rectangular polygon with a mouse

always start with the longer side and press the SHIFT key on input.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

58
4.2.1 Chapter 4 - Basics
Inserting Objects Using the Mouse

With SHIFT key depressed enter the first, second, and if required further
points in the usual way by clicking at the respective location with the
mouse. However, do not click the last point on the final edge-point but on
the already entered first point. By this, the last point is entered at the right
location and the polygon can be closed by clicking the right mouse button.
To produce rectangular layouts afterwards see chapter 11.4 Force Rectang-
le and chapter 11.5 Force Right Angles.

SegmentLength4.2.1 While drawing an open or closed polygon you can enter fixed predefined
segments holding the Ctrl key pressed. Enter the desired length (m) for the
segment. The default value is 10 m. With this you could enter e.g. equal
elements for an noise barrier.

Positioning Method After activation of the respective icon, move the mouse pointer to that lo-
3: Text Boxe cation where one corner of the box or rectangle is to be positioned. Press
and Zoom + 4.2.1 the left mouse button and hold it depressed while moving the mouse in the
direction of the desired opposite corner. Release the mouse button when
the desired location has been reached.

Positioning Method The cylinder is defined by clicking two points. The first point defines the
4: Cylinder 4.2.1 radius centre, the second the radius length.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Inserting Objects via Keyboard 4.2.2 59

4.2.2 Inserting Objects via Keyboard

First activate the desired object icon on the toolbox. You can now enter the
desired coordinates from the keyboard. As you enter the first number, the
dialog Input of Point opens.

Orthogonal coordinates may be entered as x-and-y pairs, and polar coordi-

nates as a pair of radius and angle. In the first case, which is the default
setting, the check box Polar is deactivated, in the latter it is activated.
The coordinates are entered either as absolute coordinates with respect to
the origin x/y = 0/0 (this being the default setting), or as relative coordi-
nates with respect to the last point. In the first case, the check box is deac-
tivated, in the latter it is activated.
When entering several points in a series, you can arbitrarily switch bet-
ween the insertion modes using the mouse button, keyboard, and digitizer
on the one hand, and between orthogonal and polar, or absolute and relati-
ve coordinates on the other hand. The result of an entry can be seen up-to-
date at any time in the graphic representation.
Insertion of a building of 30 m x 10 m, where the left corner of the 30-m Example
facade is positioned at a specific location in the map and the front is incli-
ned towards the x-axis by an angle of 40°.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

60
4.2.2 Chapter 4 - Basics
Inserting Objects via Keyboard

The procedure is:

• Activate the Building icon by clicking the same on the toolbox or by
pressing the hotkey CTRL+h
• Click the desired position of the building corner to be positioned (using
the mouse pointer in the graphical representation of the map on the
screen, or the digitizer magnifier on the paper map)

• Enter the value 40, press TAB, enter the value 30, activate the check
boxes Relative and Polar, and confirm by pressing RETURN (the first
side of the building is drawn)
• Enter the values 90 and 10 with the same settings and confirm (the
second side of the building is drawn)
• Enter the values 90 and 30 (third side of the building) and press RIGHT
mouse button (the rectangle is closed)

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Editing Objects in the Graphics 4.3 61

4.3 Editing Objects in the Graphics

In the edit mode, you modify existing objects in the graphic representation
by editing their characteristic parameters, thus defining their properties,
positions, and shapes.
To this end, click the Edit Mode icon on the toolbox, or press CTRL+E.
Then select the object by clicking it with the mouse. The object is then
marked. All further commands will apply to the selected object only.
For all line-like objects entered as a series of points and objects limited by
lines, such as area sources, line sources, buildings, and barriers, you can
choose between two different edit modes:
• polygon point mode (see Chapter 4.3.1) and
• stretching mode (see Chapter 4.3.2).
Clicking the Edit Mode icon on the toolbox will automatically activate the
polygon point mode. Press the TAB-key to toggle both modes.

To select an object, click its border, or, in the case of roads and railways, Selecting
its centreline, using the LEFT or RIGHT mouse button. Clicking with the an object 4.3
RIGHT mouse button at the same time opens a context menu offering you
further commands applicable to this object (see Chapter ).
Double-clicking with the LEFT mouse button opens the pertinent object
dialog (see Chapter 4.4.1).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

62
4.3 Chapter 4 - Basics
Editing Objects in the Graphics

Marker Size In Options|Miscellaneous the size of the markers (displayed when objects
are highlighted) can be selected.

markers - on the left: size 2, on the right: size 5

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Polygon Point Mode 4.3.1 63

4.3.1 Polygon Point Mode

selected polygon line selected polygon

In the insertion mode (see Chapter 4.2) each click with the mouse defines a
polygon point.
In the polygon point mode, these polygon points bear markers. You can
move, insert, delete, or allocate a height to individual polygon points.

To move a polygon point, click it, and, with the mouse button held down Moving a
(the mouse pointer turns into a black arrow), drag it to the desired location. Polygon Point 4.3.1

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

64
4.3.1 Chapter 4 - Basics
Polygon Point Mode

Adding a Polygon To add a polygon point, select the object as described above. Now, if you
Point 4.3.1 press CTRL, the mouse pointer turns into a black arrow carrying along a
box with a plus sign in it. If you click the border of the object using this ar-
row, a new polygon point will be added..

press CTRL-key near the polygon with additional

polygon’s border polygon point

Deleting a Polygon To delete a polygon point, press both CTRL and SHIFT at the same time.
Point 4.3.1 Again, a black arrow appears, this time carrying along a box with a minus
sign. Any polygon point now clicked will be deleted.

press CTRL+SHIFT-keys and click onto The polygon point is deleted.

the polygon point to be deleted

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Stretching Mode 4.3.2 65

4.3.2 Stretching Mode

Selected polygon under the stretching mode. The object is

marked by an invisible rectangle. By dragging the mar-
kers of this rectangle with the mouse button held down,
the size of the object as a whole is modified.

The stretching mode (accessed via the TAB key) does not allow you to in-
sert, delete, or move polygon points, but you can modify the size of the en-
tire object by stretching or squeezing it (see Change Dimensions further
below in this chapter).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

66
4.3.2 Chapter 4 - Basics
Stretching Mode

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Change Dimensions 4.3.3 67

4.3.3 Change Dimensions

If the polygon point mode (see above) is activated, switch to the stretching
mode by pressing TAB, and select the object by clicking its border. Then
position the mouse pointer on one of the black markers at the sides or cor-
ners of the rectangle around the selected object, and hold the mouse button
down. The mouse pointer turns into a two-headed arrow. Now you can en-
large or reduce the entire object by moving the mouse in the appropriate
direction.

object activated in stretching mode stretching the object to the

right using the mouse

Dragging the corner markers enlarges or reduces the object while maintai-
ning its proportions.
You can also adapt the size of an object by pressing SHIFT and/or CTRL.
SHIFT symmetrical change of dimensions
CTRL change of dimensions in discrete steps
SHIFT+CTRL symmetrical change of dimensions in discrete steps

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

68
4.3.3 Chapter 4 - Basics
Change Dimensions

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Relocating Objects 4.3.4 69

4.3.4 Relocating Objects

To move a selected object, position the mouse pointer on the border, not on
a polygon point, of the object, or, in the case of roads and railways, on the
centreline. Hold down the mouse button and a crossed arrow appears.

Then move the object to the desired location. The object is moved, and the
co-ordinates are updated in the pertinent object list.
To move an object horizontally or vertically along the x or y axes, press
SHIFT while you move it.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

70
4.3.4 Chapter 4 - Basics
Relocating Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Rotating Objects 4.3.5 71

4.3.5 Rotating Objects

To rotate an object mark it by a mouse click first and press the ALT-key. A
arrow-headed circle appears indicating that you are in object rotation mo-
de. Move the mouse circular around the object: The object is rotated by the
respective angle.

To rotate the object in steps of 90° keep the SHIFT-key deporessed in addi-
tion.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

72
4.3.5 Chapter 4 - Basics
Rotating Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Copying Objects 4.3.6 73

4.3.6 Copying Objects

In CadnaA, you can copy objects within the graphics and into the Win-
dows clipboard. Copying within the graphics refers to a selected object,
whereas to the clipboard, you may not only copy individual objects, but
also the entire graphics or limits, or Section thereof, all at once.

Select the object to be copied. Then hold the mouse button down while Copying within
moving the object to the location where you wish to position the copy. Be- the Graphics 4.3.6
fore releasing the mouse button, press CTRL. This generates a copy of the
selected object at the desired location.

step 1: activate object step 2: keep mouse button and

CTRL-key depressed

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

74
4.3.6 Chapter 4 - Basics
Copying Objects

step 3: release mouse button before releasing the CTRL-key:

The copy is generated.

At the same time, a further data record, with the transformed coordinates,
but otherwise unchanged data of the copied object, is inserted in the perti-
nent object list.
To generate a copy of an object and at the same time rotate it by 90° about
the vertical or horizontal axis, press and hold the CTRL+SHIFT keys du-
ring copying. This generates an object of the same size and parameters as
the existing object, with its centre at the same x or y coordinate as the co-
pied object.

To copy objects to the clipboard, you can either

Copying to the • click the pertinent icon on the icon bar, or
Clipboard 4.3.6 • select the Edit|Copy command, or
• press CTRL+C.
If objects have been copied to the Windows clipboard, you can paste them
in a different Windows application for further editing by selecting the
Edit|Paste command, or, alternatively, by pressing CTRL+V.

Copying a Select the desired object and execute one of the Copy commands.
single Object 4.3.6

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Copying Objects 4.3.6 75

Use the Section icon (rectangle with broken lines) on the toolbox to define Copying
a Section. Sections 4.3.6
To this end, position the mouse pointer on the upper-left corner of the desi-
red Section. Then, with the mouse button held down, drag the mouse to
the lower-right corner of the desired Section where you release the mouse
button. The area is marked by a rectangle.
Now switch to the Edit mode, select the rectangle and press, e. g.,
CTRL+C. The selected Section is thus copied to tSectionhe clipboard.
The rectangle marking the Section is neither copied nor printed, but only
the objects lying within the Section.

To copy the entire graphics with the defined limits, execute one of the Copying Limits4.3.6
Copy commands. During this procedure, none of the objects must be se-
lected.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

76
4.3.6 Chapter 4 - Basics
Copying Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Inserting from the Clipboard 4.3.7 77

4.3.7 Inserting from the Clipboard

You may insert the contents of the MS-Windows clipboard with Ctrl+V or
with the function from the menu Edit|Paste into the CadnaA graphics pro-
vided it is a meta file.
The inserted clipboard contents will then be a Symbol object in CadnaA
(see Chapter 9.12.3 in the CadnaA-reference manual) and also gets there-
fore its object options.
With it you are able to insert directly in your CadnaA graphics cross-sec-
tion figures, 3D-special views or CadnaA tables quickly and easyly.
The inserted meta file from the clipboard may not be bigger then 1024 pi-
xel. If that were so a frame with a cross inside appears. In that case you
have to use the CadnaA option BMP (see Chapter 10.2 in the CadnaA-re-
ference manual and chapter 9.1 Import & Calibration of Bitmaps in this
manual).
see also:
Chapter 4.3.6 Copying Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

78
4.3.7 Chapter 4 - Basics
Inserting from the Clipboard

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Deleting Objects 4.3.8 79

4.3.8 Deleting Objects

Press DEL to delete a selected object. The object will thus be deleted from
the CADNA A main window and also from the object table. If another ob-
ject of the same type exists, this will be automatically selected after deleti-
on of the previous one so that you could delete this one as well by pressing
the DEL key once again.
This method is particularly convenient for the deletion of a small number
of objects. The Delete command from the context menu (see Chapter ) has
the same effect. Using this command also deletes the selected object only.
If you wish to delete a large number of and/or different objects at once,
you can follow another convenient and quick procedure: the context menu
command Modify Objects Action Delete. (see Chapter )

The Edit|Undo command or the hotkey CTRL+Z allows you to retrieve the Undo 4.3.8
last 32 objects deleted. Just click the Undo (CTRL+Z) command as many
times as needed until the desired deleted object re-appears on your screen.
If you wish to retrieve a data record that was deleted from a row of a table,
first close the table before using the Undo command.

* Objects that were deleted via the context menu using the command
Modify Objects|Action Delete, cannot be retrieved using the Undo
command.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

80
4.3.8 Chapter 4 - Basics
Deleting Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Editing Objects 4.4 81

4.4 Editing Objects

If an object is inserted graphically with its coordinates you must still enter
the necessary object data like, e.g., number of cars per day or hour on a
road, the speed, road surface or just the sound emission value for the
acoustical calculation. This is usualy done in the edit-dialog via the key-
board. But of cause you may also import this data from an external databa-
se via the ODBC interface (see Chapter 7.5 in the CadnaA-reference
manual or chapter 9.5 in this manual).
To this end, to edit or to delete a object, first switch to the Edit Mode by
either clicking the pertinent icon or pressing the hotkey CTRL+E. Then, in
the graphic representation, you can choose among three different methods
to open the edit dialog:
1. with Insertion Mode enabled (see Chapter 4.2):
• Click with the right mouse button once on the object either on the bor-
der (e.g. area source, buildings etc.) or on the centreline (e.g. of a road,
railway etc.).

2. with Edit Mode enabled (STRG+e):

• Double-click the borderline of the desired object (or the centreline, if
the object is a road or railway), or
• position the mouse pointer on the border of the object in question. Cli-
cking with the RIGHT mouse button opens a context menu. Use the
LEFT mouse button to click Edit.
• When an object has been selected, press RETURN.

Editing Data Records in Tables:

see Chapter 11.2.3 in the CadnaA-reference manual

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

82
4.4 Chapter 4 - Basics
Editing Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Edit Object Dialog 4.4.1 83

4.4.1 Edit Object Dialog

An edit dialog of an object serves to enter all parameters characterising an

object.

Example of an Object Dialog

The desired values are entered in the boxes either from the keyboard or au-
tomatically by selecting the relevant options.
Different boxes and options are available depending both on the object
type and on the selected calculation standard. The individual boxes are ac-
cessed by pressing the TAB key or by clicking.
Some boxes are equation boxes in which the equation will be calculated
promptly and the result displayed in the box Result.PWL for Day | Eve-
ning | Night.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

84
4.4.1 Chapter 4 - Basics
Edit Object Dialog

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Dialog Options Name, ID, INFO, ObjectTree 4.4.2 85

4.4.2 Dialog Options Name, ID, INFO, ObjectTree

The boxes Name, ID, and the buttons Info and ObjectTree are described
below since they appear on almost every edit dialog of an object. The other
features will be dealt with in the relevant chapters.

The Name box contains an object name which appears in the first column Name 4.4.2
of the object table. It may comprise several thousand characters. However,
since the column width is adapted to accommodate the longest character
string among the names, it is recommended you use short terms. One of
the possibilities for finding an object is to search for its name (see Chapter
4.5).

The Info button is available on every edit dialog of an object. When you Info-button 4.4.2
click it, a box opens where you can enter specific object information and/
or string variables. The contents of the info box is not printed but you can
get out the information contained in a string variable. The box may contain
up to 30,000 characters.
If the box contains any information, the button appears blue, otherwise
grey.
You define a string variable by writting a name for it in the Info-box follo- Defining String
wed by a equals sign (without any space) and after that - directly behind Variable
without any space again - the desired information or value. Now you can
revert to the contens of a variable just by writting the string variable’s
name on another location.
GRN0=08/15 Example String Vari-
able
GRN0 is in our example the string variable and embodies the number of
the building yard. The number 08/15 can be displayed e.g. in the Result
Table as a contents of a column for a receiver point just by entering the
variable’s name GRN0 as expression.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

86
4.4.2 Chapter 4 - Basics
Dialog Options Name, ID, INFO, ObjectTree

With the string variables you can also revert to information stored in data-
bases, which have an ODBC-interface (see Chapter 9.5 "ODBC-Import")
like MS Excel or MS Access, to save them by your CadnaA objects in the
Info-box.
For that the string variable has to be stored together with the equals sign
and the information in a field of the database.

ID 4.4.2 A character string of up to 23 characters entered in the ID box allows you

to group, identify, sort, activate or deactivate for a calculation or search for
objects according to different criteria. The limitation to 23 characters in-
cludes the part of the ID due to group generation within the ObjectTree , if
any (see section „ObjectTree“ in this chapter).

Objects belonging to groups (see Chapter 10.1 "Structuring Data by Defi-

ning Groups") can be activated and deactivated via these groups. Activa-
ted objects will be considered in the calculation. Deactivated objects will
not be taken into account. The latter will appear with dashed lines in the
graphical representation (default setting).
(De)activation, ID, and grouping are powerful tools for the controlling of
projects and the handling of various project variants while using the same
file (see Chapter 10.3 "Managing Projects using Variants").
For each defined group you can present the proportionate sound pressure
level on the receiver points as partial sum level.
The check box next to ID allows you to specify 3 different activation sta-
tes for an object by clicking:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Dialog Options Name, ID, INFO, ObjectTree 4.4.2 87

If the check box is grey (default), the object is activated. This is the case
shown in the figure ("ID" written in black). The state can be manipulated
by grouping.
If "ID" is written in red, the object has been deactivated via a group and
will not be taken into account in the calculation.
If the box is checked (an x appears in the square), the object will always be
active no matter what group it may belong to and whether or not that
group, if any, is active. Therefore, "ID" will always be written in black.

If the check box is white, the object will always be inactive no matter what
group it may belong to and whether or not that group, if any, is active.
Therefore, "ID" will always be written in red. In the graphical representati-
on, these objects will be drawn with dashed lines (default setting).

The button ObjectTree is located on every Edit Object dialog. By clicking ObjectTree 4.4.2
this symbol the Dialog Select for ObjectTree is displayed. In case an Ob-
jectTree has been defined (see Chapter 10.2 "ObjectTree") the present ob-
ject can be sorted into an object group by a mouse-click.

In the Info field of the object edit dialog you can insert hyperlinks for files, Hyperlink 4.4.2
pictures, music, video, internet homepages etc. which you then can open
easily by just a mouse click from the object’s context menu.
For that enter the memovariable HYPERLINK=file. „File“ stands for the
entire path of a file including its filename e.g.
HYPERLINK=T:\Reports\2198\diagram.xls.
If you intend to forward the CadnaA file together with all linked files you
should use a relative path specification. If necessary delete the path and
name of drive from the hyperlink. It will work if all files are saved toge-
ther with the CadnaA file in the same directory on a different destination.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

88
4.4.2 Chapter 4 - Basics
Dialog Options Name, ID, INFO, ObjectTree

Instead to enter the hyperlink via your keyboard you can alternatively in-
sert the hyperlink with drag and drop. Then the definition is entered auto-
matically.
After this „Hyperlink“ is displayed in the object’s context menu and in its
local menu the linked filename (in the above example „diagram.xls“). The
file opens if you click onto its name.
For the file you also could enter an alias separated from its correct name
with a vertical line . This alias is then displayed instead the original name,
e.g.:
HYPERLINK=diagram.xls|spectrum
You can define several hyperlinks in the Info box.
The memo variable is a CadnaA attribut and can therefore also be changed
via the dialog Modify Objects, Action „Modify Attribute“, attribute:
MEMOTXTVAR, string variable: HYPERLINK.

Example 4.4.2 Objective: all path definitions shall be deleted globally.

• Modify Attribut as explained before
• Replace Strings: find what: *\\(*)
• replace with: \2
effects that all path definitions will be deleted - and replaced only with the
filename

see also the CadnaA-reference manual:

chapter 11.3.3 Column Contents
chapter 2.9.8 Calc Width of Roads
chapter 14.5 Date of Objects in Info box

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Dialog Options Name, ID, INFO, ObjectTree 4.4.2 89

Standard Deviation Sigma dB: Enter the standard deviation in dB if you Standard
want to calculate the source related uncertainty (see Chapter 6.3.3 in the Deviation 4.4.2
CadnaA-reference manual) of the emission determination.

The button AUSTAL is available only when the option CadnaA-APL has AUSTAL 4.4.2
been purchased.
In the Info-dialog box of point, lines and area sources, and of roads and
railways you can define via button AUSTAL the emission time series of
air pollutants in a table.
Further information is provided in the manual CadnaA-APL.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

90
4.4.2 Chapter 4 - Basics
Dialog Options Name, ID, INFO, ObjectTree

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Decimals in Edit Boxes 4.4.3 91

4.4.3 Decimals in Edit Boxes

You may choose the decimal separator comma or point in the menu Opti-
ons|Miscellaneous. The default is the point.
For all numbers with decimals entered in CadnaA, you will have to use the
active separating character. Entering decimals without a leading zero is not
accepted; a leading zero is always required (so 0.01, not .01).
In many cases, the program accepts either a comma or a point, interpreting
it as the active separating character. However, this is not possible in all di-
alogs.
For example, in the edit polygon point dialog, but not in the table, you may
separate the decimals of the x, y and z coordinates of a polygon point, of
track centreline distance and slope by either a comma or point. In this case,
CadnaA is able to correct the decimal point or the comma by taking it as
the valid decimal separator.
In other boxes, however, which are used for performing calculation opera-
tions, decimals must be separated by a decimal point. Otherwise, the value
will be misinterpreted or its acceptance refused.
Use the active decimal separator when you are editing in the object tables
directly. Otherwise it could be that the values are not correctly interpreted.

* The correct interpretation of the decimal separator of CadnaA in

other Windows programs also depends, among other things, on the
country settings of the operating system.
It could happen, e.g. in MS-Excel that values inserted from a
CadnaA table via the clipboard are interpreted as a date and not with
the correct number format. In this case you may have chosen the
comma as decimal separator in the system settings. To rectify the
false interpretation adjust the setting with a point for the decimal
separator.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

92
4.4.3 Chapter 4 - Basics
Decimals in Edit Boxes

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Search for Objects 4.5 93

4.5 Search for Objects

Use this command to search within the entire data stock, to identify and re-
trieve objects for editing. When an object is found, it will be selected and
displayed in the window. Pressing the RETURN key will open the relevant
edit dialog box. The Search dialog must remain opened.
The Search Again button serves to start or continue the search procedure.
Either one or an arbitrary combination of the attributes Object Type, Na-
me and ID (see Chapter 4.4.2) can be used to specify either all objects or
each of the objects to be retrieved. If more than one criterion is given, all
criteria have to be fulfilled (logical and (see Chapter 5.2 in the CadnaA-
manual „Attributes, Variables, and Keywords“).

This input would search for a point source

named either „a“ or „c

Use the List box to select the type of object. If you select the option: ?(All)
then all kinds of objects are compared to the search criteria. Otherwise,
only objects of the type specified are examined.
Wildcards can be used as customary, e.g., the asterix (*).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

94
4.5 Chapter 4 - Basics
Search for Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Scale & Zoom 4.6 95

4.6 Scale & Zoom

Use the zoom tools to modify the scale of the diagram, either via the edi-
table list box Scale 1: on the icon bar, or via the three global tools in the
toolbox

„Zoom +“

„Zoom -“

„Zoom to Limits“

By clicking the arrow to the right of the box Scale 1: on the icon bar, a list Combo Box
of predefined scales drops down. You may click the desired scale on that "Scale 1:“ 4.6
list. The graphic on the CadnaA main window will be modified accordin-
gly

Combo box

You may also enter an arbitrary scale. Click the edit box and enter the desi-
red value. Then press RETURN.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

96
4.6 Chapter 4 - Basics
Scale & Zoom

Zoom + 4.6 The "Zoom +" icon on the toolbox allows you to enlarge the graphic repre-
sentation of a specific area. After clicking this icon, the mouse pointer
drags along a little magnifier icon with a "+" sign.
There are two comfortable ways of enlarging a selected area:
1. Clicking an object with the LEFT mouse button enlarges the graphic
by a factor of two with each click. The position of the mouse pointer
becomes the new centre of the displayed area.
2. If you hold the LEFT mouse button down, you can draw a rectangle
around the objects you wish to enlarge. Upon releasing the mouse
button, the area within the rectangle will be enlarged so as to fill the
screen.
The enlarging is undone in reverse order by clicking with the RIGHT
mouse button.

Zoom - 4.6 The "Zoom -" icon on the toolbox allows you to reduce the graphic repre-
sentation of a specific area. After clicking this icon, the mouse pointer
drags along a little magnifier icon with a "-" sign.
Clicking an object with the LEFT mouse button reduces its size by a factor
of two. You may repeat this several times.
The reducing is undone in reverse order by clicking with the RIGHT mouse
button.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Scale & Zoom 4.6 97

All objects lying outside the visible area will immediately be shown on the
CadnaA window when you click this icon. The scale of the representation
Zoom to Limits 4.6
is automatically selected according to the dimensions of the limits and the
size of the CadnaA window.
If you hold the SHIFT key depressed while clicking the "Zoom to Limits"
icon, CadnaA will recalculate the limits and will also show all objects in
the window. However, the new limits are only temporary (analogous to
the command Options|Limits|Calc), which means the limits specified by
the user are not overwritten.
This feature is convenient where the specified limits cover a wide area
containing relatively few objects, or if the objects all lie within a small
proportion of the limits.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

98
4.6 Chapter 4 - Basics
Scale & Zoom

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 4 - Basics
Synchronisation Graphics & Tables 4.7 99

4.7 Synchronisation Graphics & Tables

All objects inserted via the graphics will automatically be adopted as data
records in the pertinent table of objects and vice versa. An object entered
by giving its data in the table of objects will appear as a graphic object in
the CadnaA main window. The tables of objects are all compiled under the
pertinent category term on the Tables menu.
A check mark in front of an item on the Tables menu indicates that data re-
cords of that type are available.

As you know, the tool icons (see Chapter 3.3) from the toolbox can be ac- Open Tables with
tivated via shortcuts. The edit mode, e.g., with CTRL+e, the street icon Shortcuts
with CTRL+s (see also online help keyword „Shortcut“).
You can also open the corresponding table of objects with the same cha-
racter keys, but without the CTRL key and you can close it again with the
ESC key. You press, e.g., the key s that opens the road table, key b for the
railway table and so on. By doing so the first data record is activated auto-
matically.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

100
4.7 Chapter 4 - Basics
Synchronisation Graphics & Tables

Synchronisation 4.7 The tables and the graphics are synchronised. When a record in a table is
selected, the corresponding graphic object on the main window is as well.
Even an individual polygon point, edited on a Geometry dialog, will be
flashing so you always know what you are working on.
Editing Data records may be inserted, edited, copied in and deleted from the tab-
Data records les. When a data record is deleted from a table, the corresponding graphi-
cal object on the main window is deleted as well.

Delete For deleting a data record from the table you can use either the DEL key or
Data record 4.7.0 the command Delete from the context menu.
You can bring back a deleted data record with the command Edit|Undo.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation 101

Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation

The following objects are available on the CadnaA-toolbox for the calcu-
lation of sound levels:

Receiver Point: Individual receiver points can be defined at any

location using the mouse or the keyboard.

Calculation Area: This object serves to restrict the range of cal-

culation for horizontal grids.

Vertical Grid: This object serves to define a vertical projection

surface for a vertical grid.

Building Evaluation: For buildings being marked by a building

evaluation symbol the façade levels of which are calculated.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

102 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation 103

5.1 Receiver Point

The most frequent evaluation method in noise calculation is the calculati-

on of noise levels at defined receiver points. To this end, select the object
"Receiver“ from the CadnaA-toolbox place using the mouse or the key-
board at the desired location within your project screen.

Object "Receiver" on the toolbox

For the calculation and evaluation at individual receiver points the follo-
wing features are available that are not found with grid calculations:
• A calculation protocol which contains all input and intermediate values
of the calculation (e.g. the attentuation terms) can be generated.
• Acoustic rays can be displayed between the sources and the receiver/s
which enables a geometric analysis of the propagation paths, including
reflections.
• An exceedance is indicated for - locally or globally - defined limiting
values by a red coloring of the receiver symbol.
• The partial level list shows the partial levels of all sources contributing
to the overall level at the receiver point.
• Receivers can be snapped at buildings to ensure a defined distance to
the facade’s surface.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

104 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation

Configuration Indus- The following examples are based on the use of a point sound source (in-
try ISO 9613 dustrial source) and application of the standard ISO 9613. In case you
want to follow the examples using CadnaA yourself, select this standard
on the menu Calculation|Configuration on the tab "Country" at first. Eit-
her select a "Country" which is linked to the standard ISO 9613 automati-
cally or select "(user-defined)" under "Country" and then select the "ISO
9613" from the list box "Industry".

Standard ISO 9613 for source group "industry" selected

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Calculation of sound propagation according to ISO 9613-2 5.1.1 105

5.1.1 Calculation of sound propagation according

to ISO 9613-2

The A-weighted sound pressure level at a receiver point LAT (equivalent

continuous sound pressure level) according to ISO 9613-2 is calculated
by:

L AT = L w + D I + D Ω - A div - A atm - A gr - A bar - A misc

where:

PWL sound power level in dB, relative to the reference sound

power of 1 pW

DI directivity index: deviation of the continuous sound pres-

sure level for the directionally radiating source in a speci-
fied direction from the level of an omnidirectional point
source with the sound power level PWL.
For building radiation the directivity index in CadnaA
considers the self-screening effect.

DΩ (K0) Correction for solid angle: Term that accounts for sound
propagation into angles of less than 4π steradians.

Adiv attenuation due to geometrical divergence:

The geometrical divergence calculates from the distance
d between source and receiver:
Adiv = [20 lg (d/d0) + 11] dB

with d distance source-receiver, d0 = 1m

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

106
5.1.1 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Calculation of sound propagation according to ISO 9613-2

Aatm atmospheric absorption:

Aatm =αL * d / 1000
where
αL atmospheric attenuation coefficient per kilometre,
d distance source-receiver.
In CadnaA, for the default frequency of 500 Hz, the atte-
nuation coefficient is 0.002 dB/m.

Agr attenuation due to ground effect

Abar attenuation due to screening (due to berms, barriers, buil-

dings, topography, cylinders, etc.)

Amisc attenuation due to miscellaneous effects:

- foliage Afol
- industrial sites Asite
- housing Ahous

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
A-Weighted Sound Power Level as Emission Value 5.1.2 107

5.1.2 A-Weighted Sound Power Level as Emission

Value

Enter a point source (x, y) = (100, 100) via the keyboard. To this end, pro-
ceed as follows:
• Move the vertical scroll bar down and the horizontal scroll bar to the
left. The coordinate origin (x, y) = (0, 0) is now in the lower left corner.
You can check this with the help of the mouse and the coordinates
being displayed on the status bar.
• Select the object "point source" from the toolbox with the mouse. The
symbol of the point source is now attached to the mouse arrow.

Object Point Source selected from the toolbox

• Now, enter the x-coordinate 100 using the numerical keys or the nume-
rical keypad of your keyboard. Upon entering of the first figure the
dialog „Input of Point“ is displayed:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

108
5.1.2 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
A-Weighted Sound Power Level as Emission Value

• Finalize the input of the point source’s coordinates (x, y) = (100.100).

• After click on OK the point source is shown.
• Check for the correctness of the coordinates in the edit dialog of the
point source. Change to it into the edit mode by click to the symbol
( ) in the toolbox.

• Double-click on the point source. Note that the border of the point
source represents the "hot spot".
• Click on the point source’s edit dialog on the button "geometry". The
entered coordinates are displayed.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
A-Weighted Sound Power Level as Emission Value 5.1.2 109

• Close the dialog Point Geometry and enter for the emission level of
the point source a PWL of 100 dB(A). Since "Single band" is chosen
under „Type“, this value is interpreted as the A-weighted sound power
level.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

110
5.1.3 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Effect of Distance and Air Absorption

5.1.3 Effect of Distance and Air Absorption

In the following, the effects of geometrical divergence and of air absorpti-

on are examined.
• Open the dialog Geometry of the point source once more. Enter a
height of 1000 m for the point source.

* Due to this height, there is influence of the ground attenuation and

the ground reflection on the calculation result.
• Choose the object "receiver" from the toolbox. Enter - in the same way
like for the point source - the coordinates (x, y) = (200,100).
• Double-click on the border of the receiver point to open the edit dialog.
• Set the receiver height on the Geometry dialog to 1000 m.
• Activate the option "Generate Rays (as Aux. Polygons)" at the lower
end of the dialog.

Point source and receiver point being entered

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Effect of Distance and Air Absorption 5.1.3 111

• Start the calculation by clicking on the pocket calculator symbol on the

symbol bar ( ).
• Then, open the edit dialog of the receiver point to check for the calcula-
ted sound pressure level.

Receiver: resulting level LpA = 48,8 dB(A)

Since the ground attenuation (Agr) and the reflection (Dc) can be neglec-
ted at a height of 1000 m, the calculated sound pressure level is just due to
divergence and air absorption.
LAT = LwA - Adiv - Datm
Thus:
LAT = 100 dB(A) - [20 lg (100m/1m) + 11] dB - 0,002 dB/m * 100 m
LAT = 100 dB(A) - 51 dB - 0,2 dB = 48,8 dB(A)

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

112
5.1.4 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Calculation Protocol

5.1.4 Calculation Protocol

All details of the calculation can be inspected via the CadnaA-calculation

protocol. The protocol displays all emission and immission values, inclu-
ding the attenuation terms for each partial source at every receiver point.
• To this end, on the CadnaA-main dialog, open via menu Calcula-
tion|Protocol the dialog Calculation Protocol and activate „Write
Protocol“ and close the dialog by OK.

• Restart the calculation via the pocket calculator symbol on the

symbol bar.
• Open the calculation protocol via menu Calculation|Protocol, and
click the button „Print“.
• Select the protocol preview for the receiver (IP1) withand click the but-
ton "Preview".

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Calculation Protocol 5.1.4 113

On the protocol for receiver IP1 the point source is displayed:

Protocol at receiver IP1 for the point source

The attenuations due to geometrical divergence (Adiv = 51 dB) and air ab-
sorption (Aatm = 0.2 dB) are listed.
In this case, LxT corresponds to the effective sound power level of the
point source and LrT to the sound pressure level at the receiver, both du-
ring daytime.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

114
5.1.5 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Correcting for Operating Time

5.1.5 Correcting for Operating Time

If a sound source is operating during a shorter period of time tE than the

duration of the reference time interval tB, then the time correction Dt is ad-
ded to the calculated sound pressure level to obtain the average sound
pressure level during the reference time interval.
Dt = 10 lg (tE / tB)
The reference times are specified on dialog Calculation|Configuration,
tab „Reference Time“, by assigning the letters D (day), E (evening), and N
(night) respectively for every full hour.
Prior to this, select on tab „Evaluation Parameters“ the parameters Lde
(day-evening) and Ln (night).

Evaluation parameters Lde and Ln

* Ensure the check-box „Compatibility mode for Industry (Recr./Eve-

ning is added to Day incl. Penalty)“ being deactivated!

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Correcting for Operating Time 5.1.5 115

Adjust the reference time on the tab „Reference Time“ as illustrated be-
low.

Input of reference times and penalties (example)

The reference times considered here are as follows:

• for Day (6.00 -20.00 hours): 13 hours,
• for Evening/Recruitment (6.00-7.00 hours and 20.00-22.00 hours): 3
hours,
• for Night (1 hour, activity during the loudest hour).

* CadnaA evaluates only the number of letters D, E, N when determi-

ning the reference times. It is irrelevant, therefore, in which input
boxes in the allocation of hours the respective letters are entered.
Set the penalty for Evening/Recruitment to 6 dB (by default).

* The default-penalty of 10 dB for night is not relevant as there is no

mixed evaluation parameter assessing the night period.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

116
5.1.5 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Correcting for Operating Time

The actual operation time is entered on the edit dialog of the point source.
In this example, half of the reference times are entered for the day and the
evening period, while for the night period a quarter is entered:
- Day: 390 min. operating time = ½ reference time (780 min.)
- Evening: 90 min. operating time = ½ reference time (180 min.)
- Night: 15 min. operating time = ¼ reference time (60 min.)

Thus, the following time corrections result:

- time correction day: DtT = 10 lg (390/780) = - 3 dB
- time correction evening/recruitment: DtE = 10 lg (90/180) = - 3 dB
- time correction night: DtN = 10 lg (15/60) = - 6 dB
The A-weighted sound power levels of the point source and the receiver
levels during the time periods Day/Evening and Night result in this ex-
ample as:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Correcting for Operating Time 5.1.5 117

1. time period Day/Evening:

emitted sound power Day/Evening:

receiver level Lde:

LAT = 98,9 dB(A) - 51 dB - 0,2 dB = 47,7 dB(A)

2. time period Night:

emitted sound power Night:
LwA(N) = 100 + 10 lg (15/60) dB = 94 dB(A)
receiver level Ln:
LAT = 94 dB(A) - 51 dB - 0,2 dB = 42,8 dB(A)

Those levels are displayed on the receiver’s dialog in CadnaA::

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

118
5.1.6 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Inserting an Area of Land Use

5.1.6 Inserting an Area of Land Use

In the following, an „Area of designated Land-Use“ is assigned to the re-

ceiver point. Area of designated land-use object enable to address limiting
values based in general settings for different types of areas.
• Double-click on the receiver and deactivate on the receiver’s dialog the
option "Determine from Areas of Land Use".
• Select for „Land Use“ the option „KU Kurgebiet“ (meaning „spa
area“), and for „Use Standard Values for“ the option „Industrial“.

* You can enter your own areas of land use on the dialog Land Use
(Options menu). To this end, click in an empty row in column „Land
Use“ and enter respective limiting values depending on source type
or for total..

Area of Land Use „KU Kurgebiet“ (spa area)

• Deactivate on the dialog of the point source the option „Operating

Time“ causing the source to radiate permanently.

Option „Operating Time“ deactivated

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Inserting an Area of Land Use 5.1.6 119

• Recalculate by clicking the pocket calculator symbol.

The exceedance of a limiting value is indicated by the receiver turning to
red (depending an specified type of land-use and selected performance pa-
rameter). In this case, the limiting value for the spa area is exceeded both,
during daytime and nighttime.

Receiver displayed in red: addressed limiting value exceeded

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

120
5.1.7 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Effect of Ground Absorption

5.1.7 Effect of Ground Absorption

In the standard ISO 9613-2 two different models for assessing the ground
effect (ground attenuation) are described:
• the spectral model (ISO 9613-2, section 7.3.1), and
• the model for A-weighted sound pressure levels (section 7.3.2).
When calculating only the A-weighted sound pressure level the so-called
„alternative method“ according to ISO 9613-2 can be applied under the
conditions that
• the sound progations occurs above porous or mostly porous ground,
• the sound is not a pure tone.
In this case, the ground attenuation Agr is calculated from:

⎡ 2h ⎛ 300 ⎞⎤
Agr = ⎢4.8 − m ⎜17 + ⎟ dB ≥ 0 dB
⎣ d ⎝ d ⎠⎥⎦

In order to calculate the ground attenuation for A-weighted levels accor-

ding to this formula, the setting on tab "industry" (on the dialog Calculati-
on|Configuration, „Ground Attenuation“) has to be either "not spectral"
or "spectral, spectral sources only".

Dialog Configuration, tab „Industry“

* For more details on the further settings for ground absorption see
Chapter 6.3.10 in the CadnaA-reference manual.

* With selection "none" no ground attenuation is calculated (Agr = 0

dB), however, the directivity correction according to formula (11),
ISO 9613-2 is considered.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Effect of Ground Absorption 5.1.7 121

* With setting "spectral, all sources" the frequency dependant model is

applied („general method“). For sources the emission of which is
specified by the A-weighted sound power level the entered frequency
is considered to calculate the ground attenuation (default value: 500
Hz).
• On the example, reduce the height for the point source to 0.5 m above
ground, and for the receiver’ to 1.5 m.
• Restart the calculation.
The protocol shows a ground attenuation of Agr = 4.4 dB:

To consider the apparent increase of the sound power level of the source
due to gorund reflections near the source, the directivity index DΩ is added
- resulting from distance and heights of source and receiver (here: DΩ =+3
dB).

* With spectral ground attenuation this correction is already taken into

account in the calculation of Aground.

In this example, a sound pressure level of 47.4 dB at the receiver’s locati-

on results.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

122
5.1.8 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Directivity Index

5.1.8 Directivity Index

The directivity index DΩ (=K0) is used to account for reflecting surfaces

near the source into angles of less than 4π steradians (sr). A point source
with no obstacles nearby radiates into an angle of 4π steradians.

with the angle Ω (sr).

For an angle of 2π sr (e.g. a source near the ground) a correction of 3 dB
applies.
In CadnaA, however, the level increase due to ground reflection is calcula-
ted automatically for both, for the alternative (A-weighted) as well as for
the general method (frequency dependant). The value to be entered on the
point source’ dialog is, therefore, the directivity index not considering the
ground (thus „without ground“, i.e. ignoring the ground).

So, in order to specify the directivity index all reflecting surfaces besides
the ground are relevant for the value of K0 in CadnaA.
Examples for DΩ point source above ground: solid angle 2π, K0 w/o ground = 0 dB
(resp. K0)
point source in front of a wall: solid angle π, K0 w/o ground = 3 dB
point source in a corner: solid angle π/2, K0 w/o ground = 6 dB

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Different Emission Day/Evening/Night 5.1.9 123

5.1.9 Different Emission Day/Evening/Night

In CadnaA, different emission can be specified and calculated for the three
time periods (Day, Evening, Night). To this end, adjustment or correction
values have to be entered into the corresponding input boxes „Correction“
on the noise source’ dialog (e.g. in order to consider a reduced emission
during the night-time).

Example: correktion -20 dB for emission night-time

Upon recalculation of the sound pressure level at the receiver’s location

the night-time imission value has dropped by 20 dB with respect to the for-
mer situation (28.8 dB(A) instead of 48.8 dB(A)).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

124
5.1.10 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Screening Effect

5.1.10 Screening Effect

When objects are in the ray’s path, the screening effect is taken into ac-
count by a corresponding barrier attenuation. This barrier attenuation is
calculated according to ISO 9613-2. As a rule, there are three paths consi-
dered in the calculation: one over the top of the obstacle, and two lateral
paths, around each side.

three rays at a screening object section and top view

If several objects are in the ray’s path three paths are considered for every
pair source-receiver.

three rays at several screening objects section and top view

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Screening Effect 5.1.10 125

This procedure used for several objects - at which the lateral diffraction is
accounted for by the two rays around the arrangement of objects - is an ap-
proximation. Actually, there is a variety of additional rays through the ar-
rangement of objects and these rays may determine the resulting levels in a
specific case. The described procedure, however, has proven to be an opti-
mal compromise with respect to the computation time and the on average
resulting accuracy.
In CadnaA, the lateral diffraction can be turned off with time-intensive
computations including large amounts of screening objects. In this case,
just the ray path across the upper edges of the objects is considered in cal-
culation of the screening effect (Configuration|Calculation, tab "Indus-
try").
In the following example, a building with the first corner located at (x1,
y1) = (140.90) is introduced.
• Select the o0bject „Building“ from the toolbox.

• Enter the first corner point (coorinates see above) via the keyboard and
press OK.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

126
5.1.10 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Screening Effect

• The next points can be defined relatively to the previous point. To this
end, activate the option "Relative" before entering the second point.
The second corner point {is located at ∆x2 = 20 m to the right, while
∆y2 = 0 m:

• Confirm by OK.
• Up to now, the building is just made from a single segment. CadnaA is
waiting for the third polygon point to be entered:

• Enter the third point at ∆x3=0 m and ∆y3=20 m.

• The fourth point is located at 20 m to the left, i.e. in negative x-direc-
tion. So, the required value to be entered is ∆x4=-20 m and ∆y4=0 m.
• Close the building by clicking the right mouse button. Now, the buil-
ding looks like this:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Screening Effect 5.1.10 127

• The building height has still to be defined. Change to the edit mode
(symbol in the toolbox) and double-click on the border of the buil-
ding. Click on the button "geometry" and enter a building height of 10
m.

• Click the pocket calculator-symbol on the symbol bar. The level due to
the screening effect at the building reduces to Lde=35.8 dB(A) or
Ln=13.9 dB(A).

* The calculation protocol (menu Calculation|Protocol) lists the bar-

rier attentuation Abar for the performance parameters Day (Ld = LrT)
and Night (Ln = LrN). The protocol does not show intermediate results
foir mixed levels (e.g. Lde).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

128
5.1.11 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Reflection

5.1.11 Reflection

All objects (e.g. building, cylinder, polygon object, barrier, 3D-reflector)

can be defined as reflective. An absorption or reflection coefficient can be
assigned to their surface as a single number rating or as a spectrum.
The reflection calculation is carried out according to the image source me-
thod, i.e. additional image sources are taken into account for all possible
ray paths until a pre-defined order of reflection is met.
The following figure illustrates how the 3rd order of reflection is construc-
ted when sound propagates from source Q0 to receiver IP.

The maximum reflection order is specified via menu Calculation|Confi-

guration, tab "Reflection".

* Objects will be considered as reflective only if their dimensions, pro-

jected into ray direction, in relation to the wavelength exceed a pre-
defined value. For the simplified model based on A-weighted levels,
the frequency 500 Hz is supposed per default.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Reflection 5.1.11 129

In order to continue with the preceding example a reflective barrier is ente-

red.
• Select the object „barrier“ from the toolbox.

• Enter the first polygon point via the keyboard at (x1,y1) = (130,140)
and press the OK
• The next polygon point has the coordinates (x2,y2) = (170,140):

• Confirm your input by OK and click the right mouse button to finalize
the input-procedure. The barrier is now made of just a single segment.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

130
5.1.11 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Reflection

• Double-click onto the barrier to define its parameters. Enter on dialog

Geometry a barrier height of 8 m.

• All obstacles in CadnaA are non-reflective at first. To change this,

click in the dialog Barrier on the option "Reflection Loss".
• Select the reflective properties of the two barrier sides via the two file
selector symbols . The directions "left" or "right" refer to the sides
of the barrier when looking from first point to the last point of the bar-
rier’s polygon line.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Reflection 5.1.11 131

• Choose from the dialog Reflection Type the option „Smooth Facade /
refl. Barrier“ for either sides.

• WIth those settings finalized the barrier’s dialog looks like shown
below.

• To include reflections in the calculation, the desired reflection order

must be specified on the CadnaA-configuration. To this end, open via
menu Calculation|Configuration the tab "Reflection" and select the
1st order of reflection.
• Start the calculation by clicking the pocket calculator symbol.
• In the representation, the ray of 1st order reflected at the barrier is
shown besides the direct path:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

132
5.1.11 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Reflection

• Double-click on the reflected beam (displayed as an auxiliary poly-

gon). The first part of the ID identifies this auxiliary polygon as a ray
("RAY"). The triple of numbers refers to the partial daytime level (Ld),
in this case 44.1 dB, transmitted via this ray. The following detail "01"
addresses the order of reflection of the ray.

• Close the dialog and double-click on the direct path screened by the
building. The detail also contains the transmitted daytime level [Ld =
33.9 dB(A) and the reflection order (0th order = direct path). The letter
„S" indicates that the ray is screened by at least one object on it’s ray
path.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Reflection 5.1.11 133

• The protocol of calculation (menu Calculation|Protocol) lists the

direct path in the first line (column "Refl.", zero standing for 0th order
of reflection) and in the second line the reflected ray (value "1" for 1st
order of reflection).

* The protocol of calculation shows the partial levels of the individual

orders of reflection just for the perfomance parameters Ld=LrT
(daytime) and Ln = LrN (night-time). For mixed parameters (e.g.
Lde), however, no protocol exists. The ID of a ray relates to the most
recently calculated unmixed parameter (Ld, Le, or Ln).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

134
5.1.12 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Partial Levels List

5.1.12 Partial Levels List

The noise level caused by one of many sources at a receiver point is the
partial level. The total immission level is the energetic sum of the partial
levels. The partial levels of several sources at a receiver can be listed on a
table.
• Enter a point source using the mouse. Select the object "point source"
from the toolbox and click on an arbitrary location on the screen (scale
1:1000).
• In edit mode, click with the right mouse button on the border of the
point source. The point source’s edit window is opened. Enter an A-
weighted sound power level of 100 dB(A).

Entering an A-weighted sound power level of 100 dB(A)

* This value being entered for the first object will be kept for all further
objects of the same type.
• Enter another 9 point sources using the mouse.
• Open the object table „Point Source“ on menu Tables|Sources|Point
Source.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Partial Levels List 5.1.12 135

• Click with the right mouse button into column „Name“ to open the
context menu.
• Select the command „Change Column“.

Object table for point sources with context menu in column „Name“

• Specify on „Replace with“: „PS ##“ and press OK. The name will be
replaced by the string PS and counting number.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

136
5.1.12 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Partial Levels List

• Select the receiver from the toolbox and entere a receiver at a location
among the group of point sources.

10 point sources with PWL=100 dB(A) each

• Start the calculation by clicking the pocket calculator symbol in the

symbol bar.

• Change to the edit mode by click to the edit mode symbol in the
toolbox.
• Click on the border of the receiver point. The dialog opens. Move the
dialog to the side of the CadnaA-main window.
• Click on the button "partial level" to display the list of partial levels.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Partial Levels List 5.1.12 137

Partial levels list

• You may sort the partial levels list for one of the performance parame-
ters, e.g. Lde. Click with the right mouse button in the respective table
column and select the command „Sort“ from the context menu. For
example, from this sorting the sequence of priorities with respect to
noise mitigation measures may result.

* In order to display a list of all partial levels for several receivers

select the command Partial Level on the Tables menu after calcula-
tion.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

138
5.1.13 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Spectrum as Emission Value

5.1.13 Spectrum as Emission Value

Depending on legal requirements the study often has to be carried out con-
sidering the level spectrum of the source. However, calculation based on
A-weighted noise levels - as been shown before - is possible as well when
needed.
The emission levels of the point source can be entered into CadnaA as an
spectrum in octave band width by selecting "Spectrum" for „Type“ on the
point source edit dialog.
By clicking the file selector symbol to the right of the PWL-input box the
local library of sounds levels (sound power level spectra & interior sound
pressure level spectra) opens where a spectrum can be selected.
You will find all further information on entering, processing and selection
of sound emission spectra in the CadnaA-reference manual, chapter 12.3
Spectra.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Horizontal Grid 5.2 139

5.2 Horizontal Grid

Besides the calculation at fixed receiver points CadnaA offers also the cal-
culation of noise maps on horizontal or vertical grids. Such noise maps
provide not only a visually attractive alternative representation but can
serve as a visual control for the object’s geometries as well as an evaluati-
on tool to detect possible faults in the calculation method.

Horizontal grid in a power plant

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

140
5.2.1 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Specifications for Grid Calculations

5.2.1 Specifications for Grid Calculations

Grid Spezification Both, the receiver spacing in x- and y-direction and the receiver height are
defined in the grid properties. By default, a receiver height of 4 m rela-
tively to the ground is predefined.

If you want to restrict a grid calculation just to a certain area, this can be
performed by the object "Calculation Area" on the toolbox. With several
calculation areas in a project, all active calculation areas are included in
the grid calculation.

Object „Calculation Area“ in the toolbox

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Specifications for Grid Calculations 5.2.1 141

The settings for the appearance of the calculated grid is available from the Grid Appearance
dialog Appearance on the Grid menu.

Principally, there are three types of grid to appear:

Lines of Equal Sound Areas of Equal Sound Raster with Oversamp-

Level Level ling

For large limits and a - with respect to calculation time - coarse grid spa-
cing the mode "Raster" is recommended.
By use of oversampling the boundaries between the individual colored
areas can be smoothed when using the setting „Raster“. This is caused by
an interpolation between the grid points actually calculated, though and
therefore can lead to a deviation between the calculated level at a fixed re-
ceiver point and the sound level on the grid at the same location.
By default, the calculation in CadnaA at the grid points does not differ
from the means of calculation at fixed receiver points.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

142
5.2.1 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Specifications for Grid Calculations

Example In this example, the horizontal grid using a calculation area is calculated
for a point source.
• Enter a point source with PWL = 100 dB(A) via the keyboard at
(x,y)=(100,100).
• Enter a receiver point at (x,y)=(200,100) in the same way.
• Scroll down using the vertical scroll bar and the horizontal scroll bar to
the left, in order to display the area near the origin in the main window.
• Select the object "Calculation Area" from the toolbox with the mouse.
• Draw a calculation area either with the help of the mouse or about the
keyboard. Use the following corner coordinates:

(x1,y1)=(50,150)
(x2,y2)=(250,150)
(x3,y3)=(250,50)
(x4,y4)=(50,50)
• Start the grid calculation via the Grid menu, command Calc Grid.

* In CadnaA, grid calculations are started separately from receiver

point calculations (via the pocket calculator-symbol).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Specifications for Grid Calculations 5.2.1 143

The intermediate grid values are interpolated from the grid points. So, grid Interpolation
values can deviate from the receiver point values at those locations. The
difference depends on:
- the grid resolution, and
- the distance of the interpolated point from the source..

Comparison: level at receiver point 63.5 dB(A),

interpolated level on the grid (see status bar, on the lower right): 63.7 dB(A)

* The text box showing the level at the receiver point of 63.5 dB(A)
was generated from the command Generate Label on the context
menu of the receiver (via right mouse button, attribute LP1).
• Double-click alternatively on the receiver to display the daytime level
(on dialog Receiver).
• Select on menu Grid|Appearance for grid points the option „Values".
The figure above shows the parameter LP1 at the receiver point (63.5) as
well as the value calculated on the grid by means of interpolation (see sta-
tus bar pointing with the mouse: 63.7). The difference is 0.2 dB in this ex-
ample also (see also "Display grid values" in this chapter).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

144
5.2.1 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Specifications for Grid Calculations

Lower/Upper Limit/ You can restrict the range of appearance and/or vary about class widths for
Class Width the lines or areas of equal sound level..

The following examples show the effect when restricting the range of ap-
pearance. First, select the option "Areas of the Equal Sound Level".
• increasing the lower limit (e.g. from 30 to 60 dB):

• chaning the class width (e.g. from 1 to 5 dB):

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Specifications for Grid Calculations 5.2.1 145

With progressive colors activated the grid’s colors receive a continuous Progressive Colors
transition based on color classes defined.
The following examples start from a grid spacing of 1 x 1 m.
• areal raster, oversampling 1, no progressive colors:

• areal raster, oversampling 1, with progressive colors:

You can adopt the color classes (dB-limits) individually as the color itself Color classes and
and save it to and open it from a palette file (file extension *.pal). colors

To this end, click the button "Options" on the dialog Grid Appearance. Is
useful to name the file according to the lower and upper limits (or accor-
ding to the step width, e.g. 60_80_step_2.pal).

Dialog Grid Appearance: loading & saving color palettes

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

146
5.2.1 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Specifications for Grid Calculations

Displaying grid Furthermore, grid points and grid values can be displayed:
points & grid values

Dialog Grid Appearance: options for grid points

• displaying the grid points (grid spacing 10x10m, grid not displayed):

• displaying the grid values (rounded to integers):

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Specifications for Grid Calculations 5.2.1 147

The following grid formats can be save (via menu Grid|Save as): Saving the grid
CadnaA, ASCII, LIMA, NMGF

The following grid formats can be read:

CadnaA, ASCII, AUSTAL, ESRI, Immi, LIMA, NMGF (from NMPlot,
TNM, INM) and SoundPlan.
By multiple selection several grid files can be opened at once (e.g. with
segmented grids).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

148
5.2.2 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Grid Arithmetics

5.2.2 Grid Arithmetics

By the grid arithmetics different grids can be combined with each other.
For example, effects resulting from reflection, screening or triangulation
can be rendered visibile in a easy and informative way. The dialog Grid
Arithmetics (on the Grid menu) enables to load up to six grid files and to
perform calculations thereof.

Example See how a barrier changes the sound contours. Proceed for it as follows:
• Add a point source at (x,y,z)=(100,100,0.5), and a receiver ) at
(x,y,z)=(200,100,1.5).
• Enter a calculation area using the mouse or via the keyboard (e.g. with
the corner coordinates ((x1,y1)=(50,150), (x2,y2)=(250,150), (x3,y3)=
(250,50) and (x4,y4)=(50,50)).
• Start the grid calculation with a receiver spacing of 1 x1 m and with
appearance setting „Lines of Equal Sound Level".
• Save the grid (menu Grid|Save as) with the file name "without bar-
rier“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Grid Arithmetics 5.2.2 149

• Enter a barrier via the keyboard from (x1,y1)=(150,75) to

(x2,y2)=(150,125) and with a height of 6 meters (dialog Geometry).

Editing a barrier height of 6 m

• Recalculate the grid and save the resulting grid again via menu
Grid|Save as using the file name „with barrier“.

grid showing the barrier effect

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

150
5.2.2 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Grid Arithmetics

• Open the dialog Grid Arithmetics the grid file named "without bar-
rier" for grid R1 and the file "with barrier“ for grid R2 - both using the
file selector symbols in either lines R1 and R2.
• Enter on the lower part of the dialog („Expression for new Grid“) in
line Lde the equation „r1-r2“ for the first performance parameter. Since
the screening effect is considered for linearilly when calculating the
receiving level, this expression will result in the barrier attenuation
Abar being displayed on the grid.

Dialog Grid Arithmetics: Calculate a difference grid

• Since the values to be displayed fall below the lower limit of appea-
rance range and, also, the color palette is unsuitable for small values,
both settings have to be corrected for.
• Open the dialog Grid Appearance from the Grid menu.
• First, save the current grid settings via button „Save Palette". Enter
"Default.pal" as file name.
• Change the lower limit to 0 dB and redefine the color classes in steps
of 2 dB (see figure below).
• Save these settings under a new file name, e.g. „0_20_step_2.pal“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Grid Arithmetics 5.2.2 151

Lower limit of the level range and color classes changed

• Upon clicking OK the lines of equal barrier attenuation Abar are dis-
played on the screen.

Difference grid showing the screening effect

• Using the CadnaA-object „Level Box“ (symbol: ) from the toolbox,

the level at distinct locations on the grid can be displayed. To this end,
select this object from the toolbox and click at positions of your choice
within the grid.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

152
5.2.2 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Grid Arithmetics

Difference grid with level boxes

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Vertical Grid 5.3 153

5.3 Vertical Grid

The object "vertical grid" enables to perform grid calculations on vertical
cross sections showing the noise distribution as on a vertical projection
screen. You can print, copy, save or display the vertical grid in the 3D-Spe-
cial view.
By default, the receiver spacing of the vertical grid and the grid appearan-
ce are the same as for the horizontal grid.
As an example, the former situation with a point source, a receiver, and a Example
barrier in between is used (see chapter 5.2.2 Grid Arithmetics).

* We assume that you carry out the examples in a sequence starting

from the preceding section. In this case, open on dialog Grid|Appea-
rance the palette file "Default.pal" as saved in section 6.2 before
recalculating the grid.
To calculate the vertical grid proceed as follows:

• Select the symbol "Vertical Grid" (symbol: ) on the toolbox and

draw a line made from two polygon points crossing the point source
and the receiver.

Vertical grid made of a line from two points

• Double-clicking the vertical grid will display its dialog showing the
grid.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

154
5.3 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Vertical Grid

• By default, the vertical grid’s properties and the appaerance parameters

are set to "global", i.e. these are taken over from the horizontal grid.
After deactivation of the respective option the settings can be changed
separately for the vertical grid. If necessary alter these options.
• Make sure that the receiver spacing is 1x1 m and that the option "Lines
of the Equal Sound Level" is specified.
• Click the button "Calculate". After calculation the vertical grid is dis-
played.

* When the option "Calculate, automatically“ is activated this vertical

grid will be automatically recalculated when the horizontal grid is
recalculated (menu Grid|Calc Grid).
• After having clicked with the mouse once into the lower part of the dia-
log (grid part) the vertical grid can be zoomed iin and out using the
mouse wheel.

default setting vertical grid being zoomed in

By default, the height (z-extension) of the vertical grid is 20 m. This can

be adjusted to the dimensions of the obstacles via the dialog Geometry of
the vertical grid (button "Geometry").

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Vertical Grid 5.3 155

The vertical grid also displayed in the 3D-Special view. There, the vertical 3D-Special View
grid appears as a vertical projection screen showing the corresponding
sound level distribution. To this end, press the key combination CTRL+3.
You can navigate in the 3D-Special view by use of the forward and back-
ward arrow keys and with the left button of the mouse depressed.
For further details on the navigation tools for the 3D-Special view please
refer to the CadnaA-reference manual, chapter 9.15 3D-Special View and
9.16 Paths of 3D Special View.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

156
5.3 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Vertical Grid

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Building Evaluation & Building Noise Map 5.4 157

5.4 Building Evaluation & Building Noise

Map

The building evaluation in CadnaA enables the calculation of noise levels 5.4
at façades of buildings due to noise impact from industry, roads and rail-
way tracks. For the respective noise type the standard or guideline as sep-
cified in the configuration of calculation is applied. Based on the building
noise map one can determine facade points meeting or exceeding a limi-
ting sound level.
In this introduction a point source is used to explain the fundamental pro-
cedure and the most essential features. The calculation is carried out accor-
ding to the standard ISO 9613.

Building noise map with facades colored based in noise level

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

158
5.4.1 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Building Evaluation

5.4.1 Building Evaluation

For the calculation of facade levels the building evaluation symbol in the
CadnaA-toolbox is used.

The building evaluation symbol:

To calculate facade levels, proceed as follows:

* As an alternative to the keyboard enter the objects using the mouse in

order to speed up the input procedure. In this case, consider the prin-
ciples described in chapter 4.2.1 Inserting Objects Using the Mouse.
• Add a point source at (x,y)=(100,100) and a building with the follo-
wing corner coordinates:

(x1,y1) = (140,90),
(x2,y2) = (160,90),
(x3,y3) = (160,110),
(x4,y4) = (140,110).

Enter a building height of 10 m on the dialog Geometry.

• Select the building evaluation symbol from the toolbox and click
within the borders of the building. The screen now looks as follows:

• Double-click on the border of the building evaluation symbol. Click in

the dialog on the button "Options" to display all options.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Building Evaluation 5.4.1 159

In order to address a limiting value areas of land use can be assigned for Select Type of Land
which corresponding limiting values have been defined. Alternatively, a Use
type of area can be set after deactivation of the option „Determine from
Areas of Land Use“. In CadnaA, the pre-defined types of land use are lis-
ted on the menu Options|Land Use. For example, for the land use "WR
reines Wohngebiet" (in English: pure residential area) the following limi-
ting values are defined depending on the noise type:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

160
5.4.1 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Building Evaluation

• Select the object „Area of Designated Use" (symbol: ) from the

toolbox and draw a polygon around the building.

Building with building evaluation symbol and Area of Designated Use

• Double-click on the border of the area of designated land use and select
"WR" from the list of land uses. Upon closing of the dialog the area is
displayed according to the settings specified on the dialog Land Use
(Options menu).
Define Height of Furthermore, on the dialog Building Evaluation Symbol it is defined how
Storeys the facade points are distributed across the building’s height. To this end,
the height of ground floor above ground („Height Rcvr EG above
Ground“) and the further heights of storeys can be defined. A predefined
height of ground floor above ground of 2.5 m and a height of storey of 2.8
m results in:
- the first floor reaching from 0 to 2.5 m height, and
- the 1st floor reaching from 2.5 to 5.3 m etc.
The input box "Rounding up with last digit" enables to fix a rounding rule
for the building noise levels indicated. For example, the default setting of
0.1 dB causes a level of 59.1 dB(A) to be rounded up to 60 dB(A).
Furthermore, via the button „Exclude Facades" facade parts not to be con-
sidered in calculation can be deactivated.
• Start the calculation by a click on the pocket calculator symbol on the
symbol bar.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Building Evaluation 5.4.1 161

After the calculation the range of stories in which exceedances (facade le- Display of Results
vel above limiting value) is shown on the upper semicircle of the building
evaluation symbol. If this semicircle remains empty, no exceedance occu-
red or an area of land use has not been assigned. The lower quadrants re-
port the maximum levels for the day- and nighttime (i.e. for the first two
performance parameters defined).

Building evaluation symbol with exceedances for storeys II and III

(level for perf. parameter 1: 62 dB(A), for parameter 2: 40 dB(A))

The results of the building evaluation are displayed as well on the table Table Building Eva-
Building Evaluation (menu Tables|Other Objects). luation

Object table „Building Evaluation“

On this table, the size of the building evaluation symbol can be changed. Changing the Sym-
bols Size
• Click with the right mouse button in column „Coordinates, ∅ (m)“.
• Select from the context menu the command „Change Column“.

• On the dialog select „Arithmetic“, enter a new value of 4 m and close

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

162
5.4.1 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Building Evaluation

the dialog by OK.

Now, the building evaluation symbol is displayed with half of his former
diameter.

* Of course, you can also overwrite the value shown on the object table
of 8 m by typing "4". The procedure first-mentioned, however, provi-
des a more comfortable approach with a variety of building evalua-
tion symbols.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Automatically assigning Building Evaluation Symbols 5.4.2 163

5.4.2 Automatically assigning Building Evalua-

tion Symbols

For a large number of buildings, the building evaluation symbols can be

added automatically. This action can, if necessary, be established based on
a a numerical condition or limited to a defined area in your project. First, a
source and a number of houses are entered.
• Enter a point source with an A-weighted sound power level of 100
dB(A).
• Enter in the vicinity of the point source a building with a height of 10
m (Scale 1:1000).

Point source with building nearby

• Click on the border of the building with the right mouse button and Context Menu:
select the command Duplicate from the context menu. Duplicate Buildings
• On the dialog Duplicate, enter the values as shown in following figure.
Upon OK, five columns and four rows of buildings are generated. The
negative sign for „Vertical“ (i.e. the y-axis) causes the duplicates to be
generated with 10 m gaps downwards (i.e. into negative y-direction).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

164
5.4.2 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Automatically assigning Building Evaluation Symbols

Duplicating buildings

Assigning names to In the next step, a name shall be addressed to all buildings. This can be
the buildings achieved easily via the object table.
• Open the table Buildings via menu Tables|Obstacles.
• Click into column "Name" with the right mouse button and select the
command Change Column from the context menu.
• Select for the range of rows "Whole Table", replave in the inpu box
„Replace with“ the default entry „\1“ by the string „building ##“ and
press OK. The buildings receive the name "building" followed by a
two-digit numbering.
• The action is immediately executed when pressing the OK-button.

Table Buildings: new names addressed

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Automatically assigning Building Evaluation Symbols 5.4.2 165

• Select the object "Area of Designated Use" from the toolbox and draw Addressing Area of
a polygon around the building. This enables later on to assign a limi- Land Use
ting value to the building evaluation symbols to be defined.
• Open the dialog Area of Designated Land Use by a double-click on
its border and select the type of use „WR“ (i.e. pure residential area)
from the list box „Land Use“.

Arrangement of buildings with area of designated land use

All the building’s duplicates have the same height as the initial building. 3D-Special view
Via the key combination CTRL+3 the 3D-Special view is displayed.

Arrangement of buildings in 3D-Special view

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

166
5.4.2 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Automatically assigning Building Evaluation Symbols

* Areas of designated use are not displayed in the 3D-Special view.

• Close the 3D-Special view.

• Click with the right mouse button into the white area on the CadnaA-
main window and select from the context menu the command Modify
Objects.
Addressing building The dialog Modify Objects assigns actions to a selection of CadnaA-ob-
evaluations jects. Detailed explanations of all actions and all further options on the di-
alog are in Chapter 11 - Modify Objects in this manual.
• Select the action „Generate Building Evaluation“ and click on the
object type "Building" in the lower list to specify the target object type.

• Upon OK, the number of objects affected by this action are shown on a
further dialog. The change can be confirmed for each object individu-
ally (Yes) or be rejected (No). With „All“ the action is carried out
immediately for all objects found.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Automatically assigning Building Evaluation Symbols 5.4.2 167

• After confirmation of the change by clicking "All" the building evalua-

tion symbols is addressed to all buildings.
• Start the calculation by clicking the pocket calculator symbol in the
symbol bar. Subsequently, the facade points and the resulting levels are
shown within the building evaluation symbols.
• Select from the Options menu the command 3D-View and on this dia- Building Noise Map
log from the list box the view „Gen. Parallel“.

• Via the arrow keys left/right on your keyboard you can rotate the buil-
dings with the facade points attached in 3D-view.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

168
5.4.2 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Automatically assigning Building Evaluation Symbols

Building Noise Map in 3D-view (Options menu)

* Areas of desinated land use are not displayed in 3D-Special view.

Settings for Building By default, the maximum level at every facade point is evaluated and dis-
Noise Map played. This and further settings relevant for the building noise map are
available on the dialog Building Noise Map (Options menu).
• Open the dialog Building Noise Map.
• In the upper half, the option "Maximum" is selected as the averaging
method. This means that the highest facade level of all facade points is
assigned the building.
• Change in section „Appearance of Building Noise Map“ of the dialog
the option „Show Facade Points“ to „(all)“ and close the dialog with
OK.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Automatically assigning Building Evaluation Symbols 5.4.2 169

* Further information on the available settings on the dialog Building

Noise Map are described in see Chapter 5.6.1 "Building Noise Map"
in the CadnaA-reference manual.

• Reopen the 3D-View on the Options menu (General Parallel). Now,

the building noise map is displaying all facade points.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

170
5.4.2 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Automatically assigning Building Evaluation Symbols

• Close the dialog 3D-View and press the key combination CTRL+3 to
enable the 3D-Special View.

On the building noise map, the facade points are represented by three rib-
bons for the three storeys along the building’s facade. The colors corres-
ponds to those specified on dialog Grid Specification (Grid menu).
The ribbons along the facades reach for each storey by definition from 0 to
2.5 m, from 2.5 to 5.3 m, and from 5.3 to 8.1 m. Since the remaining
height of 1.9 m is less than required one for another storey the colors do
not extend above 8.1 m.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Result Table for the Building Noise Map 5.4.3 171

5.4.3 Result Table for the Building Noise Map

For documentation, the results of the building evaluation can be listed in a

table. The CadnaA-Result Table displays the calculation results in a user-
definable table format both, for individual receivers and for facade points.
• Select the command Result Table from the Tables menu and click the
button "Edit".
• Select from the lower end of the dialog Edit Result Table for „Recei-
vers from Building Noise Map" the option „(all)“.
• Now, some table columns are edited:
- Double-click in line no. 2 and replace the string „ID“ by "storey".
- Select for „Column“ the entry "(String variable)" and enter STW as
the expression to display the storey’s name.
- Double-click in line no. 3 and replace the entry „Flurst." by
„FacPtNo“ (meaning „facade point number").
- Select "(String variable)" at "Column" and enter the expression
FASSNR to display the number of the facade point.
- Click in the line no. 7 and press the delete key (DEL) three times.
Thus, the lines "relative road axis, station/distance/height are dele-
ted.
- Furthermore, click into line no. 11, "Lr w/ noise control", and then
press the delete key (DEL) five times. By that, the lines 11 to 15 is
deleted.
Now, the dialog Edit Result Table looks like shown on the next page:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

172
5.4.3 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Result Table for the Building Noise Map

Editing the result table

• The current table format can be saved via the button "Save" and
applied in a further project. After click on OK the result table shows
the new format.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Result Table for the Building Noise Map 5.4.3 173

To shorten the table’s length just the facade points with exceedances can
be displayed.
• To this end, reopen the dialog Edit Result Table via button „Edit“.
• Activate the option "Only exceeding BNM-Receivers" (BNM=Buil-
ding Noise Map) on the lower end of the dialog and close it with OK.

Result Table: receivers with exceedances only

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

174
5.4.3 Chapter 5 - Modes of Calculation
Result Table for the Building Noise Map

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources 175

Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources

Sound propagation for industrial sites and commercial areas as well as for
all other noise relevant facilities that have stationary (fixed) noise sources
or discrete moving sources is modeled based on the concept of point-, line-
and area-sources the emission of which is specified by the sound power le-
vel.

Point, line, and area sources

on the CadnaA-toolbox

In this chapter the following tasks often encountered in industrial noise

modeling are described:
• building radiation (by facades, facade parts, or by an entire building),
• internal traffic lanes (e.g. inside industrial plants, traffic in pits, or on
race tracks) or traffic areas (e.g. areas with fork-lifters, loading/unloa-
ding of goods, harbour areas),
• directivity of sound sources (predefined or user-defined directivities),
• modeling of the directivity at chimneys and stacks (as a special case),
• areas with defined ground absorption characteristics, and
• consideration of meteorology (wind influence).
In all cases the international standard, ISO 9613-2, is applied to model the
propagation (see dialog Configuration, tab Country).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

176 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources 177

6.1 Building Radiation

Buildings are not just obstacles to sound propagation, but can also emit
noise into the surrounding area. The calculation according to the corres-
ponding standard (e.g. ISO 9613-2) models buildings as a set of connected
barriers, open in the top (i.e. "open boxes“). This approach causes the
sound power of a source located inside the buildings envelope to be dif-
fracted over the buildings outer walls. This does not model reality so sour-
ces in buildings must be treated differently. Therefore, the sound radiation
of buildings is modeled by attaching noise emitting sources to the outside
of the building’s envelope.

Sound radiating facades at a power plant

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

178
6.1.1 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Entering a Sound Radiating Facade

6.1.1 Entering a Sound Radiating Facade

Object Snap A vertical area source is attached to the outside of a building’s facade by
use of the command Object Snap.
• Enter a building with 20 m of edge length using the mouse and set the
building’s height to 10 m relative (dialog Building|Geometry).
• Select the command Object Snap from the Options menu.
• On the dialog Object Snap a snap radius can either be entered in
meters (i.e. scale dependant) or in pixels (i.e. not scale dependant).
Enter a snap radius of 10 pixels.
If the building’s facade is located inside this snap radius upon mouse click,
CadnaA catches the point at the defined distance of 0.05 m off the facade.
This procedure prevents sources to be entered inside a building’s envelope.

Dialog Object Snap, snap radius 10 pixels

Entering a vertical • Select the vertical area source (symbol: ) from the toolbox and click
area source consecutively at two points outside the building’s facade, close to the
corners. Finalize the input by clicking the right mouse button.
• By zooming in with the magnifying glass (+) the vertical area source.
outside the building polygon can be recognized.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Entering a Sound Radiating Facade 6.1.1 179

• Select the auxiliary polygon symbol ( ) and measure the distance

between the facade and the vertical area source by clicking with the
mouse on the building’s border and dragging the auxiliary polygon to
the projection line of the vertical area source.

Distance building - vertical area source = 0.05 m

• Finalize this procedure by pressing the right mouse button.

• Now, click with the right mouse button on the vertical area source and
select from the context menu the command Set Length. Enter a length
of 19 m.

• Open the edit dialog of the vertical area source.

• Click on button „Geometry“ and enter a height of 10 m for the upper
edge of the vertical area source. Close the dialog Geometry.
• Specify on the dialog Vertical Area Source a z-extent 10 m. The z- Editing the vertical
extent is the vertical dimension from the upper edge downwards. area source

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

180
6.1.1 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Entering a Sound Radiating Facade

Entering the z-extent

Directivity index K0 With vertical area sources the directivity index K0 is set to 3 dB automati-
cally („K0 without ground“). This default setting takes the reflection at the
building into account causing the radiated sound power to be increased ap-
parently by 3 dB - ignoring the ground reflection. This is equivalent to the
statement that the source radiated into half-space, instead of into full
space. Here, the ground as a reflector is not considered since the ground
reflection is taken into account automatically by CadnaA. The following
cases apply:
- source at a height above ground: K0 = 0 dB
- source at a height above ground in front of a wall: K0 = 3 dB
- source at a height above ground in a corner: K0 = 6 dB
Making use of the directivity index K0 (DΩ in ISO 9613-2) requires that no
calculation of reflections at the building near to the source occurs. There-
fore, on menu Calculation|Configuration, tab Reflection, a value of 0.1
m is entered for "Min. Distance Source-Reflector". For sources located
closer to a reflector than this distance no calculation of reflections is car-
ried out.
3D-Special View • Press the key combination CTRL+3 the enable the 3D-Special view..

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Entering a Sound Radiating Facade 6.1.1 181

• Move the camera location using the arrow keys (forward/backward)

and the mouse (left mouse button depressed), to catch a view of the
vertical area source.

• Double-click in 3D-Special view onto the area source.

• Activate on the lower left hand side of the dialog the option
„Trans.Loss“. The dialog switches from PWL/PWL“ to the interior
level.
• Enter an interior level of 90 dB(A) and a transmission loss of 25 dB. Entering interior
level and transmis-
sion loss

Edit dialog: After entering of interior level and transmission loss

the resulting sound power level PWL and PWL“ are displayed.

The A-weighted sound power radiated by the area source calculates from:
PWL = Li - TL + 10 lg (S/S0) - 4 dB = 90 - 25 + 22.8 - 4 = 83.8 dB(A)

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

182
6.1.1 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Entering a Sound Radiating Facade

PWL“ = Li - TL - 4 dB = 90 - 25 - 4 = 61.0 dB(A)

* For the calculation in frequency bands the radiated sound power per
octave band width results from:
PWLokt = Li - R + 10 lg (S/S0) - 6 dB or
PWLokt“ = Li - R - 6 dB

For the modeling of sound radiation from buildings or from building parts,
in principal, the point, the line, and the area source are also suitable as well
as the vertical area source. Whether to model the radiation from the one or
the other object type depends on the available input data, the situation (e.g.
distance and partial-screening), and on precision requirements.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Entering a Strip Window 6.1.2 183

6.1.2 Entering a Strip Window

In order to model a window as a radiating surface, a vertical area source is

attached to the front of the building’s facade in question by use of the com-
mand Object Snap (Options menu). It is similar to the building radiation,
as treated above already.
On the dialog Geometry of the vertical area source the height of the top
edge is specified. By entering a z-extent (on dialog Vert. Area Source) the
bottom edge is defined (i.e. positive distance from the upper edge down-
wards).
• Enter a factory hall with 30x10 m of base and a height of 10 m.
• Before entering the strip window select the command Object Snap.
• Keep the default distance of 0.05 m, define a snap radius of 10 pixels
and close the dialog.
• Select the vertical area source and enter two polygon points with the
mouse outside the building’s borders, but nearby the building corner
points.
• Double-click on the vertical area source to open the edit dialog.
• Click button "Geometry", enter 5 m as the window’s upper edge, and
close the dialog.
• On the edit dialog, enter a value of 2 m as z-extent. Thus, the strip win-
dow has a height of 2 m, reaching of 3 m to 5 m above grounds.
• Close the edit window and press the key combination CTRL+3 to dis-
play the 3D special view.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

184
6.1.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Entering a Strip Window

Building with strip window on a long side

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Generate Radiating Building 6.1.3 185

6.1.3 Generate Radiating Building

The command Generate Building from the context menu can be applied
to model a building whose outer walls and the roof are sound radiating.
• Enter a horizontal area source forming the building’s base. Entering an Area
Source
• Activate the option „Trans.Loss" on the edit window of the area source.
• Enter an interior sound pressure level of 100 dB(A) and a transmission
loss (weighted sound reduction index) of 30 dB.

Area Source: Emission based on interior level and transmission loss

• Click on the border of the area source with the right mouse button and Generate Building
select the command Generate Building from the context menu.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

186
6.1.3 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Generate Radiating Building

Command Generate Building from the context building

• On the dialog Generate Building enter a height of 8 m and close the

dialog by OK.

* In addition, the absolute ground height at the houses base and the
absorption coefficient can be entered, either as a single number rating
or as a referenced spectrum.

Upon closing the dialog by OK CadnaA generates:

1. a building of the specified height - in this example - of 8 m height,
2. die respective numbers of vertical area sources for each facade
and
3. a horizontal area source as radiating roof.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Generate Radiating Building 6.1.3 187

The emission relevant parameters for each subsequent source are taken
from the first area source entered. The area sources are fixed at a distance
of 0.05 m in front of the walls or above roof plane, respectively.
The directivity index K0 for the vertical area sources (i.e. radiating faca-
des) is set automatically to 3 dB, while for the horizontal area source (i.e.
radiating roof) no directivity index is taken into account (K0 = 0 dB).

Generate Building: building with 6 corners

On the plan view, the area source representing the roof’s radiation is hid- Changing Sequence
den by the building’s polygon. To change this, open the dialog Layer on of Layers
the Options menu. The ranking of objects on this dialog determines the
sequence when CadnaA draws objects onto the screen. The object being at
the top end of the list is drawn first, the one at the bottom is drawn last. So,
the building has to be ranked at a higher position in the list of layers than
the area source.
• Open the dialog Layer.
• Click on „Area Source“ in layer list and keep the left mouse button
depressed.
• Drag with the mouse the „Area Source“ downwards in the list, below
the „Building“ and release the mouse button.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

188
6.1.3 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Generate Radiating Building

Dialog Layer: Dragging the „Areas Source“

below the „Building“

• Click on button „Apply“ and move the dialog apart to see the result
more easily.
• The area source - shown with a hatching - is no drawn above (i.e. after)
the building has been drawn.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Internal Driveways and Areas 6.2 189

6.2 Internal Driveways and Areas

Vehicle noise on non-public roads or lanes inside industrial sites or plants
may also to be taken into account when assessing the noise impact from
such areas. This may also apply to the traffic entering and leaving the
works via public roads, but being due to factory needs (e.g. transport of
material, products & goods). Such internal drive ways and areas can be:
• traffic inside the works (e.g. fork lifters, tippers, and wagons),
• traffic inside pits or on race tracks,
• loading areas with fork lifts and such (e.g. loading of bulk cargo),
• harbour areas with traffic.
In these cases the calculation cannot be carried out based on a road noise
standard or guideline since the emission model thereof just refers to public
roads. Thus, the modeling in CadnaA makes uses the concept of the mo-
ving point source. The relevant objects to model a moving point source are
CadnaA’s line and area source.

Internal traffic inside of an industrial site

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

190
6.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Internal Driveways and Areas

Example: moving • Select the line source from the CadnaA-toolbox and enter a line from
point source of line two points with coordinates (x1,y1)=(100,100) and (x2,y2)=(200,100).
source type 6.2
• Change you to the edit mode (key combination: CTRL+E) and double-
click the line source.
• Switch the emission type from "PWL' " to "PWL-Pt“.

Upon this selection, the former input box for „Correction" switches to
"Number/h Q" and a further input box is displayed to enter the speed.
• Enter 100 dB(A) as A-weighted sound power level of the single point
source.
• Enter for number of events (i.e. pass-bys) the following values: Day/
Evening/Night = 40/20/10 pass-bys per hour.
• Keep the speed of 10 km/h.
The dialog displays the resulting PWL and the PWL ' based on those va-
lues.

Line Source: emission based on moving point source

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Internal Driveways and Areas 6.2 191

The A-weighted sound power level PWL calculates from:

Q l v
LwA = LwA − PQ + 10 lg + 10 lg − 10 lg − 30 dB
(h −1 ) ( m) (km / h)

in this example for daytime (with a source length of l=100 m):

LwA = 100 + 10 lg 40 + 10 lg 100 − 10 lg 10 − 30 dB = 100 + 16 + 20 − 10 − 30 = 96 dB ( A)

* On dialog Geometry just the 2D-length of line objects is indicated:

2D-length with line objects

The A-weighted sound power level PWL’ per unit length calculates from:
Q v
LwA ' = LwA − PQ + 10 lg − 10 lg − 30 dB
(h −1 ) (km / h)

in this example for daytime:

LwA ' = 100 + 10 lg 40 − 10 lg 10 − 30 dB = 100 + 16 − 10 − 30 = 76 dB ( A)

The emission during the periods Evening and Night are 3 dB lower each
due to halving of the amount of pass-bys.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

192
6.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Internal Driveways and Areas

Example: moving An area source is used to model areas of traffic circulation in such cases
point source of area where there are no driving paths or tracks explicitly defined.
source type 6.2
• Select the area source from the CadnaA-toolbox and enter an area
source defined from the following corner coordinates:

(x1,y1) = (100, 100)

(x2,y2) = (200, 100)
(x3,y3) = (200, 150)
(x4,y4) = (100, 150)
• Switch to the edit mode and double-click onto the border of the area
source.
• Select on the dialog Area Source on the list box „PWL“ „ the option
„PWL-Pt“.
• Enter an A-weighted sound power level of the single point source of
100 dB(A) and the following numbers of vehicles in the three time
periods: Day/Evening/Night = 40/20/10 vehicles.
The dialog displays now the resulting PWL and PWL’’.

Area Source: emission based on moving point source

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Internal Driveways and Areas 6.2 193

The A-weighted sound power level PWL calculates from:

LwA = L wA − PQ + 10 lg Q

in this example for daytime (with a source area of S=5000 m²):

LwA = 100 + 10 lg 40 = 116 dB ( A)

* On dialog Geometry the 2D-area (besides the 2D-length) of area

objects is indicated:

2D-area with area objects

The A-weighted sound power level PWL’’ per unit area calculates from:
S
LwA " = LwA − PQ + 10 lg Q − 10 lg
(m 2 )

in this example for daytime:

LwA " = 100 + 10 lg 40 − 10 lg 5000 = 100 + 16 − 37 = 79 dB( A)

Again, the emission during the periods Evening and Night are 3 dB lower
each due to halving of the amount of pass-bys.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

194
6.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Internal Driveways and Areas

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Directivity 6.3 195

6.3 Directivity
In CadnaA, the directivity of sound sources can be considered either by
predefined directivities for certain source types (e.g. stacks) or by user-de-
fined directivities.
On the edit dialog of all industrial sources (point, line, area sources) a but-
ton „Directivity“ is available. On the Directivity dialog pre-defined and
entered or imported directivities can be selected. By default, all source ty-
pes mentioned above have no directivity addressed.
The directivity correction is added in the calculation of the emitted sound
power.

Dialog Directivity

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

196
6.3.1 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Pre-defined Directivities

6.3.1 Pre-defined Directivities

From the list box on the dialog Directivity predefined directivities can be
selected. The following frequency-independent directivities are available
(literature links see chapter 1.7 in the CadnaA-reference manual):
1. radiation from building elements according to ÖAL 28 (amendment
Feb. 2001 /24/),
2. radiation of openings according to ÖAL 28 (ed. Dec. 1987 /24/), and
3. radiation of chimneys according to VDI 3733 (ed. July 1996 /49/).
For chimneys the directivity depends on the wind speed, the exhaust velo-
city and the temperature of the exhaust gas.
Directivity vector, The forward direction (direction 0°) of the directivity vector depends on
Automatic Direction the source type:
• Point source: The auto-vector points in the direction of the normal vec-
tor of the reflecting surface of an object nearby.
• Line source: The vector points in the direction of the line (seen from
first to last point).
• Area source: The vector points in the direction of the normal vector of
the area (right-hand rule).
• Vertical area source: The vector points to the right when looking from
first to last polygon point.
Example: point In a following example, the use of a predefined directivity is explained
source in front of a using a point source in front of a building.
building
• Enter a building with 10 m side length (scale 1:500).
• Enable the feature Object Snap with a snap radius of 10 pixels at a dis-
tance of 0.05 m.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Pre-defined Directivities 6.3.1 197

• Choose the Point Source from the toolbox and click within the snap
radius in front the building’s right facade, approximately the middle.
The point source is set at a distance of 0.05 m after that in front of the
facade.
• If you double-click on the point source’s border the edit dialog is dis-
played.
• Enter an A-weighted sound power level of 100 dB(A) and a value of 3
dB for "K0 without ground".
• Click on button „Directivity“ and select from the list box the pre-defi-
ned directivity „Element“. Keep the setting} directivity "Automatic
Direction".
• Draw a calculation area around the building and calculate the grid
using a grid spacing of 1x1 m (menu Grid|Properties) as a line grid
(menu Grid|Appearance).

Point Source at a building with directivity „Element“, automatic direction

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

198
6.3.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
User-defined Directivities

6.3.2 User-defined Directivities

User-defined directivities are entered into CadnaA’s local library in order

to later get assigned to the relevant source.
• Open the table Directivity (local) on the menu Tables|Libraries
(local).
• Select from the context menu (right mouse button) the command
„Insert after“ and double-click into the new row. The dialog to enter
directivities is opened.
• Enter as a name e.g. "dir 1".
• Since the calculation makes use of A-weighted levels with the main
frequency of 500 Hz the directivity is just entered into the 500 Hz
column. Enter the following values:
0°: 100 dB; 45°: 95 dB; 90°: 90 dB; 135°: 85 dB; 180°: 80 dB.
• Activate the option "normalized". This setting normalizes the specified
sound levels to an energetic sum of 0 dB. Thus, not altering the emitted
sound specified on the source’s dialog.
• Close the dialog with OK.

Input data for directivity „dir 1“

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
User-defined Directivities 6.3.2 199

• Open the dialog Directivity by a double-click onto the row in the table
Directivity (local) again. Consider that the intermediate directivity
values have been interpolated by CadnaA.
• Enter a point source with an A-weighted sound power level of 100
dB(A) and define a calculation area around that source.
• On the source’s edit dialog click the button „Directivity“ and select the
user-defined directivity „dir 01" from the list box. For the time being,
keep the setting "Automatic Direction".
• Calculate the horizontal grid after having the grid spacing to 1x1 m and
appearance to „Lines of Equal Sound Level“.

Point symmetrical propagation by a point source

Obviously, no directivity was considered in the xy-plane since the propa-

gation is point symmetrical. The ground acting as near reflector causes the
directivity vector to be orientated automatically into the positive z-direc-
tion.
• Select the object Vertical Grid from the toolbox and draw a line from
two polygon points across the point source from left to right.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

200
6.3.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
User-defined Directivities

• Double-click on the vertical grid and click on the button "Calculate".

Vertical grid for a point source with automatic directivity in z-direction

To aim the directivity in the xy-plane, the option "Automatic Direction"

has to be deactivated and a suitable direction (i.e. 0°-direction) to be ente-
red.
• Open the point source dialog and click the button „Directivity“. As can
be seen, CadnaA has orientated the directivity vector into the positive
direction of the z-axis automatically (x = y = 0, z = 1).
• Select the option „Vector" to enable the input of x,y,z-coordinates.
• Enter the coordinates x = 1, y = 0, and z = 0, to point the normal direc-
tion (0°-direction) into the direction of the positive x-axis (so, pointing
to the right).
• Close all dialogs with OK and start the grid calculation. This results in
the following representation:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
User-defined Directivities 6.3.2 201

• Open the dialog Directivity of the point source once more.

• Enter for the vector’s coordinates x = 1, y = 1 and z = 0 to aim the
directivity vector to 45° (i.e. the angle bisector between positive x and
y-axis).
• Close all dialogs by OK and start the grid calculation.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

202
6.3.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
User-defined Directivities

The coordinate input on the dialog Directivity refers to the unit circle. The
triple (x, y, z) = (1,1,0) points into direction of 45°. With respect to the unit
circle this results in the values x=y=0.7071. CadnaA displays those values
upon reopening the dialog Directivity. The following calculation formulae
for the non-normalized directivity vector into direction ϕ (in degrees) app-
ly:

Where, ϕ is the angle between the directivity vector - projected on the xy-
plane - and the positive x-axis. The angle ϑ is the angle between the direc-
tivity vector and the xy plane.

Polar coordinates and orthogonal coordinates

For the orthogonal coordinates, normalized to the unit circle, it holds:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Frequency Dependant Directivities 6.3.3 203

6.3.3 Frequency Dependant Directivities

Furthermore, frequency dependent directivities covering the entire frequen

cy range can be copied via the clipboard to the dialog Directivity (menu
Tables|Library (local)|Directivity) or be imported via CadnaA’s ODBC-
interface.
1. Inserting via the clipboard:
• To this end, mark and copy a section with data in a MS-Excel spreads-
heet to the clipboard.
• On the opened edit dialog Directivity click the button „Paste“.
Subsequently, the data will be pasted starting from the cell in the upper left
(i.e. 0°, 31.5 Hz).
2. Import of directivities from a MS-Excel file via the ODBC-interface
(for example, with directivities in columns per direction and per
octave):
• Select the command Database|Definition from the File menu.

Dialog File|Database|Definition

• Select an ODBC-driver on "Data Source" (e.g. for MS-Excel). All

ODBC-drivers installed on your system are listed.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

204
6.3.3 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Frequency Dependant Directivities

• Move on the list „Object Type“ downwards and select „Directivity" by

mouse click.
• Activate the option „Import Object Type“.
• Now, on the list box „Table“ a data range defined in the MS-Excel file
can be selected. This data range has to be defined in MS-Excel prior to
the import operation.
• In the table „Assign Columns" each CadnaA-attribute can be assigned
to a column of the MS-Excel table. The attributes of the directivity
index has the structure "Sxxx_yyyy", where:

xxx: angle from 0° to 180°

yyyy: frequency from 31 to 8000 Hz

(example: S000_31 or S180_8000)

• Close the dialog Database by OK.
• Select the command Database|Import from the File menu. On the fol-
lowing dialog activate the option "Append nonexisting Objects“ and
click OK.

Now, the data is imported. Check for the correct import on menu Tab-
les|Libraries (local)|Directivity.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Radiation from Stacks and Chimneys 6.4 205

6.4 Radiation from Stacks and Chimneys

When modeling stacks and chimneys two radiation components are of re-
levance:
1. The sound emitted by the chimney’s opening („mouth“)} is modeled
by a point source located at this height with a corresponding directi-
vity.
2. The radiation by the chimney’s cylinder can be taken into account by
a vertical line source - for reasons of simplicity with uniform radia-
tion - located at the chimney’s axis.
Both cases are discussed in the following.

Sound radiation by the chimney’s opening and by the cylinder itself

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

206
6.4.1 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Radiation by the Stack’s Mouth

6.4.1 Radiation by the Stack’s Mouth

In order to consider the screening and the reflecting effect of the chimney
correctly and, in particular, to display the chimney in the 3D-representati-
ons correctly the cylinder is used in CadnaA.
By a specific configuration setting it is ensured that the cylinder itself does
not cause a screening effect to the point source representing the radiation
from the chimney’s opening.
• Switch the scale to 1:1000 and select the cylinder from the CadnaA-
toolbox (symbol: ).
• Click to the middle of the main window. This first polygon point repre-
sents the center of the cylinder.
• Drag the mouse at the side to fix the radius. The length (in this case the
radius) is shown along the line. Click with the mouse button once more
when the value is about 3 m. A circle is drawn representing the cylin-
der in xy-plane.
• Double-click on the cylinder’s border and click on the button "Geome-
try".
• Enter a radius of 3 m and a height of 20 m.

Geometrical data of the cylinder

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Radiation by the Stack’s Mouth 6.4.1 207

• Select the point source in the CadnaA-toolbox and put a point source
in the center of the cylinder using the mouse.
• Click with the right mouse button on border of the point source to open
it’s the dialog.
• Enter an A-weighted sound power level of 100 dB(A) and click on the
button "Directivity“.
• On the dialog Directivity, select from the predefined directivities the
option „Chimney“ and enter the following data:

Exhaust Velocity: 5 m/s

Exhaust Gas Temperature: 150 °C
Wind Speed: 3 m/s
• Close the dialog Directivity and click on button „Geometry“.
• Enter a height of 19.95 m for the point source.

Specifying the height of the point source

• Close the point source’s dialog and select the command Configuration
from the Calculation menu. Then click on the tab „Industry“.
• Activate on tab „Industry“ the option "Sources in Building/Cylinder do
not shield“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

208
6.4.1 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Radiation by the Stack’s Mouth

By activation of this option it is ensured that the cylinder’s screening effect

is not taken into account twice: on the one hand due to the pre-defined di-
rectivity "Chimney" - which includes the screening effect in its data set -
and, on the other hand, in the calculation of sound propagation where the
cylinder’s edge provides screening as well.
This option being activated in CadnaA, the cylinder as screening object
for the point source is ignored in calculation of propagation (resulting in
Abar = 0 dB for those rays).
• The vertical grid is used to represent the result. Select this object from
the toolbox (symbol: ).
• Draw the vertical grid made from 2 polygon points across the cylinder
with the cylinder’s circle in the middle of the line approximately.

Vertical grid to display the radiation from a chimney

• Double-click on the vertical grid and enter via button „Geometry“ a

height of 40 m (= top edge of the vertical grid).
• Deactivate the dialog option "global" beneath the two buttons "Specifi-
cation" and "Appearance".
• Enter a grid spacing via button "Specification" of 1x1 m and select the
„Lines of Equal Sound Level“ via button "Appearance“.
• Start the calculation by clicking the button "Calculate".

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Radiation by the Stack’s Mouth 6.4.1 209

The result indicates that there the cylinder does cause no screening as this
effect is already considered by the directivity pattern.

You can convince yourself that the screening effect of the cylinder is not
included by inserting a receiver point.
• Enter a receiver point near the cylinder.
The receiver point has per default a height of 4 meters. If the cylinder cau-
ses screening it should result in a reasonable value of Abar on the calculati-
on protocol.

Chimney with a close receiver point

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

210
6.4.1 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Radiation by the Stack’s Mouth

• Select the command Protocol on the Calculation menu and activate

the option "Write Protocol".

• Run the calculation clicking the pocket calculator symbol .

• Open the dialog Protocol again and click the button "Print".
• Choose the protocol preview for the receiver IP1.

Protocol for receiver point: Abar = 0 dB

The protocol shows that no screening effect by the cylinder has been ac-
counted for. A receiving level of 54.3 results - in this example - is just due
due the radiation from the chimney’s opening.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Radiation by the Stack’s Shell 6.4.2 211

6.4.2 Radiation by the Stack’s Shell

The sound radiation from the chimneys surface is particularly relevant

with light steel chimneys which may have a small sound reduction index
or transmission loss. In CadnaA this radiation component is considered by
a vertical line source in the chimney's axis.
• First, zoom in using the zoom-in tool (e.g. to scale 1:100).
• Select the line source and enter a short line nearby the cylinder’s center
point.

Cylinder with a short line source near the cylinder’s axis

• Double-click on the line source and click the button "Geometry".

• Activate the option "Last Point“ and enter a height of 19.95 m for the
last point.
• Close the dialog Geometry and activate the option „Trans.Loss“ on the
line source’s edit dialog.
• Enter an interior level of 90 dB(A) and a transmission loss of 30 dB.
• The radiating surface of the cylinder results from: π r² l = π * 9 * 20 =
565 m². Enter this value into the input box „Area (m²)“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

212
6.4.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Radiation by the Stack’s Shell

Data of the line source

• Now, select a scale of 1:1000.

• Double-click on the vertical grid and start the grid calculation (via but-
ton „Calculation“).

Vertical Grid: radiation from the chimney’s opening and its cylinder

When radiating from the opening and from the cylinder the resulting recei-
ver level is 56.3 dB(A), in this example.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Ground Absorption 6.5 213

6.5 Ground Absorption

The calculation of ground absorption is determined by the standard or gui-
deline chosen for each noise type. With modeling of industrial sources ac-
cording to ISO 9613-2 two ground attenuation models have to be
distinguished:
1. spectral method according to section 7.3.1 of ISO 9613-2 with the
ground factor G as a parameter, and
2. method for A-weighted levels according to section 7.3.2 of ISO
9613-2 not using the ground factor G.

On the toolbox the object „Ground Absorption“ (symbol: ) enables one

to define areas with a specific ground factor G when applying the spectral
method of ISO 9613-2. Consequently, these areas are not relevant for the
method for A-weighted levels of ISO 9613-2.
Open on dialog Configuration (Calculation menu) the tab „Ground Ab- Default Ground
sorption“. The „default ground absorption“ applies to all areas within the Absorption
limits not being defined by ground absorption areas. The „default ground
absorption“ (ground factor) is defined to G=1 by default (i.e. "porous
ground“).

Tab Ground Absorption: specifying default ground absorption

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

214
6.5 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Ground Absorption

tab Industry With the industrial guideline ISO 9613-2 several methods can be selected
from the dialog Configuration, tab „Industry“.

Tab Industry: options for ground absorption

The following four options are available:

Selection Procedure

none No ground attenuation Agr is calculated. The ground

reflection DΩ , however, is considered using equation
(11).

not spectral The ground attenuation Agr is calculated for spectral

and non-spectral sources is calculated according to
the method described in section 7.3.2.

spectral, spec- For spectral sources the method according to section

tral sources 7.3.1, in all other cases the method according to sec-
only tion 7.3.2 is applied.

spectral, all For spectral and for non-spectral sources the method
sources according to section 7.3.1 is used. For non-spectral
sources the ground attenuation is calculated based on
the specified octave band center frequency.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Ground Absorption 6.5 215

By default, the option „spectral, all sources“ is selected. Keep this setting
for all further calculations.
• Select the object „Ground Absorption“ from the toolbox and enter an Specifying areas of
approximately circular area in the middle of the screen (scale 1:1000). ground absorption
• In order to smooth the contour select the command Spline from the
context menu of the ground absorption area.
• Enter a point source with an A-weighted sound power level of 100 dB
(A) to the left of this area.
• Define a calculation area surrounding the source, the ground absorp-
tion area and the area on the right of the ground absorption area (as dis-
played on the following figure).

Calculation area with point source and ground absorption area

• Double-click on the border of the ground absorption area. By default, Reflecting ground
"hard ground" is predefined (ground factor G=0). Keep this value and absorption area
close the dialog.
• Open on dialog Configuration (Calculation menu) the tab „Ground
Absorption“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

216
6.5 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Ground Absorption

Keep the „default ground absorption“ (ground factor) of G=1 (i.e. "porous
ground“). Thus, a reflective area inside the absorbing limits is assumed.
• Adjust the grid spacing to 1x1 m (menu Grid|Specification) and select
„Lines of Equal Sound Level“ (menu Grid|Appearance).
• Run the grid calculation via the Grid menu (command Calc Grid).

Grid with reflecting ground absorption area

The resulting grid shows the lines of equal sound level bended to the out-
side when looking from the source’s location. Because the area being re-
flective the sound energy is reflected by the ground leading to a level
increasecompared with the absorbing case.
Absorbing ground • Open again the tab „Ground Absorption“ (menu Calculation|Configu-
absorption area ration) and change the default ground absorption to G=0.
• Double-click on the border of the ground absorption area and specify a
ground factor of G = 1.
• Start the grid calculation again.
In this case, the lines of equal sound level are bent towards the source’s lo-
cation due to the sound energy absorbed with distance - compared to the
reflecting situation outside that ground absorption area.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Ground Absorption 6.5 217

Grid with absorbing ground absorption area

For information on the further options on tab „Ground Absorption“ see the Further options on
CadnaA-reference manual, chapter 6.3.8 Ground Absorption Tab. tab Ground Absorp-
tion

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

218
6.5 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Ground Absorption

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Meteorology 6.6 219

6.6 Meteorology
Since wind direction and wind speed influence the sound propagation, the-
se parameters are either taken into account in the calculation or are already
part of the calculation model’s basic assumptions.
The calculation method in ISO 9613-2 calculates the equivalent conti-
nuous A-weighted sound pressure level for downwind conditions of pro-
pagation (for detailed definition see ISO 9613-2, section 5). These
meteorological conditions represent a favorable propagation situation
where for source-receiver combination (acoustic ray) slight downwind is
assumed.
To correct for wind situations deviating from this assumption the so-called
„meteorological correction“ Cmet is used. According to ISO 9613-2, equa-
tion (6), it holds:

L AT ( LT ) = L AT ( DW ) − C met
where
- LAT(LT): long-term average A-weighted sound pressure level for the
meteorological situation under consideration (LT=long-term),
- LAT(DW): equivalent continuous A-weighted sound pressure level for
downwind conditions (DW=downwind),
- Cmet: meteorological correction.

The calculation according to ISO 9613-2, section 8, is as follows: Correction Cmet 6.6

⎡ 10(hs + hr ) ⎤
C met = C 0 ⎢1 − ⎥
⎢⎣ dp ⎥⎦

for d p > 10(hs + hr ) ,

else C met = 0 .

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

220
6.6 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Meteorology

Where
- C0: correction factor in dB,
- hs: source height above ground, in meters,
- hr: receiver height above ground, in meters,
- dp: distance source-receiver projected to the horizontal ground plane.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Correction based on C0 6.6.1 221

6.6.1 Correction based on C0

Provided values for C0 are available for the time periods Day, Evening, Configuration
and Night these can be directly entered on dialog Configuration, tab „In- Industry
dustry“.
• Open the dialog Configuration|Industry.
• On the tab, select for under "Meteorology“ the item „Cmet, constant
Co„ instead of „none“.
• Enter the values 2, 1 and 0 dB for D/E/N, respective and close the dia-
log.

Dialog Configuration|Industry: Input of constant C0-values

• Enter a point source with A-weighted sound power level of PWL = 100 Example
dB(A) at (x,y)=(100,100) and two receivers at (x1,y1)=(180,100) and
(x2,y2)=(200,100).
• Choose on dialog Configuration|tab „Performance Parameters“ (Cal-
culation menu) the performance parameters 1:Ld, 2:Le and 3:Ln and
deactivate the check box in front of the column "Name".
• Name both receiver by RCVR 1 and RCVR 2 in the table Point Source
(Tables menu).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

222
6.6.1 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Correction based on C0

• Select from the Calculation menu the command Protocol and activate
the option "Write Protocol".
• Start the calculationby clicking the pocket calculator symbol in the tool
bar.

Result level Ld|Le|Ln for the Result level Ld|Le|Ln for the
receiver at a distance of 80 m receiver at a distance of 100 m

In this case, no meteorological correction applies at 80 m distance, but at

100 m distance.
Limit for distance source-receiver:

d p > 10(hs + hr ) = 10(4 + 4 ) = 80 m

Thus, for the receiver at 80 m distance no Cmet-correction is accounted for.
For the receiver at 100 m distance the Cmet-corrections result in:

C met ,d = 2 [1 − 0.8] = 0.4 dB

C met ,e = 1 − 0.8 = 0.2 dB
C met ,n = 0 dB

• Open the protocol (Calculation menu|Protocol, buttons „Print“ and

„Preview“)
• Successively select the protocols for receivers 1 and 2.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Correction based on C0 6.6.1 223

For receiver 1 the correction is Cmet=0 dB (for Ld and Ln). For receiver 2,
however, a value of Cmet = 0.4 dB results for the daytime value (Ld), while
for the night Cmet = 0 dB.

* The results on the protocol always refer to the daytime and night-
time levels (Ld and Ln) and not to the evening level (Le) or to mixed
parameters (e.g. Lde, Lden) even if these are selected as performance
parameters.

Calculation protocol for receiver 1: no Cmet-correction for day- and nighttime-levels

Calculation protocol for receiver 2: Cmet-correction for daytime-level Ld=LrT only

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

224
6.6.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Correction based on Wind Statistics

6.6.2 Correction based on Wind Statistics

Wind Statistics With a local wind statistics available this distribution can be used to calcu-
late the meteorological correction in CadnaA.
• Open the dialog Configuration|Industry, select for "Meteorology" the
option "Cmet, Co from wind statistics" and click the button "Wind Sta-
tistics".
• The dialog Wind Statistics enables to specify the wind frequency in
30° sectors for the assessment period (a year). Enter a value of 50 into
the two sectors located next to the North direction.

Wind statistics for North wind (= wind from North direction)

* The sum of the values entered (wind frequencies) does not need to be
100 as CadnaA normalizes the values entered automatically to the
sum.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Correction based on Wind Statistics 6.6.2 225

In CadnaA, two methods for calculation of C0 from wind statistics are Method LfU Bavaria
available:
- method published by the Bavarian Environmental Protection Agency
(LfU Bavaria), and
- method published by the Environmental Protection Agency of North
Rhine-Westphalia (LUA NRW).
In this example the approach according to LfU Bavaria is used which is:

⎛ Tm − K m Tq −
Kq
Tg −
Kg
⎞
C 0 = −10 lg⎜ 10 10
+ 10 10
+ 10 10 ⎟
⎜ 100 100 100 ⎟
⎝ ⎠
where
Tm percentage of annual downwind situations and calmness (inversions) in %
Km level difference to the downwind situation in dB
Tq percentage of annual cross-wind situations in %
Kq level difference of cross-wind situations to the downwind situation in dB
Tg percentage of annual upwind situations in %
Kg level difference of upwind situations to the downwind situation in dB

The percentages T for downwind, crosswind, and upwind result from the
wind frequencies in the following sectors:
downwind: +-45° in direction of propagation (=90° sector) and calmness,
crosswind: 45° to 135° and 225° to 315° in direction of propagation,
upwind: +-45° opposite to the direction of propagation (=90° sector).
The red line in the chart represents the value of the direction-dependent C0 Circular Diagram
in dB. The outer circle corresponds to C0 = 5 dB. The value per circular
sector results from the entire distribution when the ray is pointing from the
border of this sector to the center. Upon calculation, the direction-depen-
dent C0 is evaluated for every ray. From this the value of Cmet is calculated.
• Enter a point source with an A-weighted sound power level of Example
PWL=100 dB(A) at (x,y)=(500,500) and four receivers with the follo-
wing coordinates:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

226
6.6.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Correction based on Wind Statistics

receiver to the North: (x1,y1)=(500,600)

receiver to the South: (x2,y2)=(500,400)
receiver to the West: (x3,y3)=(400,500)
receiver to the East: (x4,y4)=(600,500)
• Name the receivers on the receiver’s table (Tables menu) by the letters
N, S, W, E according to their direction.
• Define a rectangular calculation area which includes all four receivers.
• Select the command Protocol from the Calculation menu and activate
there the option "Write Protocol".
• Start the calculation by clicking the pocket calculator symbol in the
tool bar.
• Set the grid spacing to 1x1 m and select the „Lines of Equal Sound
Pressure“ (menu Grid, Grid properties or Appearance respectively)
and calculate the grid (command Calculate Grid on Grid menu).

Grid with wind from North and four receivers

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Correction based on Wind Statistics 6.6.2 227

• Open the protocol (menu Calculation|Protocol, buttons „Print“ and

„Preview“)
• Successively select the protocol for receivers 1 to 4.
The following Cmet-values are displayed on the respective pages:
receiver to the North: Cmet = 2 dB
receiver to the South: Cmet = 0 dB
receiver to the West: Cmet = 0.3 dB
receiver to the East: Cmet = 0.3 dB
For the to the receiver located to the North the average level reduces due to
the predominant North wind (= upwind) by 2 dB, for the receivers to the
East and to the West by 0.3 dB. The level at the southern receiver point, si-
tuated in the downwind direction remains unchanged. These values result
from the wind statistics as shown below.
For the receiver to the North (i.e. upwind from the North): Receiver North

⎛ 0 0 −
1. 5
100 −10 ⎞⎟
10

C 0 = −10 lg⎜⎜ + 10 10 + 10 ⎟ = −10 log 0.1 = 10 dB

⎝ 100 100 100 ⎠
and

⎡ 10(4 + 4) ⎤
C met = 10⎢1 − = 10 * 0.2 = 2 dB
⎣ 100 ⎥⎦

For the receiver to the South (i.e. downwind from the North): Receiver South

⎛ 100 0 −
1. 5
0 −
10
⎞
C 0 = −10 lg⎜⎜ + 10 10 + 10 10 ⎟⎟ = −10 lg 1 = 0 dB
⎝ 100 100 100 ⎠

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

228
6.6.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Correction based on Wind Statistics

So:

C met = 0 dB

Receiver West and For the receivers to the West and to the East (i.e. crosswind from the
East North):

⎛ 0 100 −110.5 0 −
10
⎞
⎜
C 0 = −10 lg⎜ + 10 + 10 10 ⎟⎟ = −10 log 0.71 = 1.5
⎝ 100 100 100 ⎠
and

⎡ 10(4 + 4) ⎤
C met = 1.5⎢1 − = 1.5 * 0.2 = 0.3 dB
⎣ 100 ⎥⎦

Deviating Nord In case the North direction in the CadnaA-file does not correspond with
Direction the North direction assumed by default (N = top), a North arrow can be in-
serted using the object "Symbol" pointing towards the correct North direc-
tion. Then, CadnaA rotates the North direction of the wind statistics into
the new North direction.

• Select the object "Symbol" symbol ( ).

• Drag with the mouse a small area (square) on the CadnaA-main win-
dow on.
• Open the edit window of the symbol (with the right mouse button in
the edit mode or with a left mouse button in the edit mode).
• Select from the list on dialog "symbol" the item "North Arrow 1" and
enter an angle of 45°.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Correction based on Wind Statistics 6.6.2 229

Symbol „North Arrow 1“ at an angle of 45°

• Close the dialog by OK and restart the grid calculation (menu

Grid|Calc Grid).
The result shows the lines of equal sound level based on the North direc-
tion rotated by 45 degrees. Thus, the resulting Cmet-values differ from tho-
se in the preceding situation (see protocol).

Grid with North direction rotated by 45°

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

230
6.6.2 Chapter 6 - Modeling Industrial Sources
Correction based on Wind Statistics

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads 231

Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads

For the modeling of the sound propagation of roads and of other source ty-
pes (like traffic lights/crossings and parking lots) the following objects are
available in the CadnaA-toolbox:

Road, traffic lights/crossing and parking lot

on the CadnaA-toolbox

The treatment of the objects "crossing" and "parking lot" depends on the
regulations of the selected road noise standard. In the following chapter
the German road noise guideline RLS90 is used as the calculation method
for roads (default setting on tab „Country“ on dialog Configuration).
When a different road noise standard is selected traffic lights and parking
lots are still calculated according to RLS90 as long as the selected guideli-
ne does not specify its own calculation scheme.
In this chapter the following topics are dealt with:
• entering road geometry,
• specifying road emission,
• road with a parallel barrier,
• elevated roads and bridges (also with barriers),
• barrier optimization alongside of a road,
• level vs. time diagram for vehicle pass-bys.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

232 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads 233

7.1 Entering Road Geometry

The noise emission of the parametric source "road" depends on the selec-
ted road noise standard (menu Calculation|Configuration, source group
„Road“).
It is presupposed hereinafter that the guideline "RLS90" was chosen for
"Germany (TA Lärm)" as a country or - with setting „(user defined)“ - the
guideline „RLS90“ was selected. If necessary please, check this.
Upon selection of the road symbol from the toolbox the road can be Entering a road
entered as a polygon line.

• Select the object "Road" from the toolbox (symbol: ).

• Select a scale of 1:1000 and click with the mouse in the left part of the
main window to define the first polygon point of the road.
• Move the mouse to the right and click to a second location.
• Click the right mouse button to finalize the input road.

• Change to the edit mode by clicking the arrow in the left top corner
of the toolbox.
• Double-click with the mouse on the axis of the road. The edit dialog
Road for RLS90 opens.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

234 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads

Edit dialog Road (for RLS-90)

Specifying road There are three ways to specify road width:

width
1. Specifying the distance between the centerlines of the outer lanes:
To this end, enter in box "SCS/Distance (m)" a numerical value. With
that width being zero the road will be modelled by just a single emis-
sion line.
2. Specifying the distance of the road’s curb-to-curb distance:
In some road noise standards, the road width is defined starting from
the curb. This option is available as a second option when clicking on
the file selector symbol ( ). In this case, the emission lines are loca-
ted at half the value of the additional width as defined on the dialog
Options|Appearance for the object type "Road" (default value: 3.5
m).
3. Selecting of a default cross-section according to RAS Q 82 + 96 (see
/29/ and /30/ in the CadnaA-reference manual):
Furthermore, various cross-sections are available via the file selector
symbol resulting from German road construction guidelines.
Select a cross-section using the mouse and click the OK button.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads 235

In all three cases the dotted line/s represent the emission line/s. By default,
the road crub is drawn as full line while the overall road’s axis is drawn as
a thick dotted line. All appearance settings can be modified on the dialog
Appearance (Options menu) via the object types "Road" and "Road 2" .

* All settings defined for the Object „Road“ on the dialog Appearance
concern merely the graphic representation and are not relevant to the
location of the emission lines.
The distance from the road axis to the crub (additional width) is set via ob-
ject type „Road" stopped with a default value of 3.5 m for both sides of the
road (corresponds to 1.75 m on either side).

Dialog Appearance, object type „Road“: additional width 3.5 m

• Enter on the edit dialog Road a road width of 3 meters and close the Example
dialog with OK.

Road with a road width of 3 meters

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

236 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads

The entered road width represents the distance of the emission lines (dis-
tance between the center lines of the outer lanes). The distance from the
emission lines to the crub is half of the additional width entered on the dia-
log Options|Appearance „Road“. This holds for all other types to specify
road width analogously.
Variable Road Width When the road width changes in the course of the road, this can be taken
into account in CadnaA for each road section. Assume, the road width
changes from 3 to 5 m, then continues for two polygon points with con-
stant width and then reduces to 2.5 m.
• Enter a new road with at least 6 polygon points using the mouse.
• Double-click on the road axis to open the dialog.
• Enter for „SCS/Distance" a value of 3 m.
• Drag the dialog Road aside to be able to see the entire road and then
click on the button "Geometry".

Dialog Road: Geometry, entering a road with

of 5 m at the second polygon point

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads 237

• In the upper part of the dialog Road:Geometry the point list with the
polygons x,y coordinates is shown. Enter into the second line in
column "Dist (m)" a value of 5 m. The polygon point edited is blinking
in the screen representation.
• Enter the values for the road width at the further polygon points accor-
ding to the following table:
x (m) y (m) z (m) Ground (mDist (m)
LSlope (%
589.63 437.09 0.00 0.00
624.76 446.88 0.00 0.00 5.00
650.96 455.35 0.00 0.00
675.83 468.31 0.00 0.00 5.00
710.49 473.87 0.00 0.00 2.50
741.71 490.27 0.00 0.00

• Close the dialogs Road|Geometry and Road with OK.

Varying road with at polygon points

The edited road widths are retained for the subsequent polygon points as
long as no other value is entered.
A further table column „LSlope (%)“ on dialog Geometry enables to spe- Variable Lateral
cify the lateral slope of the road. The lateral slope is acoustically only rele- Slope
vant when it alters the position of the emission lines considerably.
• Open the dialog Road from the previous example and drag this aside
again.
• Open the dialog Road:Geometry.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

238 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads

• Double-click into the first line of the point table. Subsequently, the
dialog Road:Point is opened.
• Move to the second polygon point by clicking once the right arrow key
and enter there a lateral slope of 5%:

Lateral slope of +5% at the second polygon point

• Move two polygon points downwards using the right arrow key
and enter a latareal slope of -5%.
• Close all three dialogs by OK.
• Select from the road’s context menu the command 3D-Special.
On the 3D-Special view the lateral slope can be judged visually. Press the
RETURN-key to move the camera along the road.

Road with lateral slope

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads 239

* The lateral slope is interpreted as a rotation around the road’s axis. A

positive lateral slope increases the right curb when looking from first
to last point, while a negative slope increases the left curb. An ente-
red value applies to all following polygon points until a new value is
entered.
Further instructions how to enter complex road geometries can be found in
the CadnaA-reference manual, chapter 2.9.1 Specification of Road
Widths.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

240 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Specifying Road Emission 7.2 241

7.2 Specifying Road Emission

The emission caused by the traffic of a road is characterized by its emissi-
on level. This value is calculated automatically according to the selected
standard or guideline by CadnaA based on the road’s traffic data.
With the German road noise standard RLS 90 and the option „Strictly ac- Configuration|tab
cord. to RLS-90“ selected on tab „Road“ the following rules apply: Road

• The 1st order of reflection is calculated only (irrespective of the set-

ting of the maximum reflection order on tab "Reflection“).
• The two outer lanes are represented each by an emission line.
• No lateral diffraction and no attenuation by foliage and built-up areas
are taken into account.
The emission level Lm,E according to RLS-90 is the average emission level Emission Level Lm,E
at a distance of 25 m from the axis of an infinite long road and free (unobs-
tructed) sound propagation.
The emission level Lm,E considers:
- number of vehicles per hour M
- percentage heavy vehicles p (%)
- speed limit vmax (referred to 100 km/h)
- different vmax for autos (cars) and trucks
- road gradient and
- road surface
- multiple reflections

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

242
7.2 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Specifying Road Emission

Specifying Road The emission by a road can be specified in CadnaA in four different ways:
Emission
Entering MDTD In the simplest case the road emission is described by the mean daily traf-
fic counts (MDTD = „Mean Daily Traffic Data“):
• Select the object "Road" from the toolbox and enter a road running
from the left to the right across the screen using the mouse (scale
1:1000).
• Double-click on the road’s axis and enter a road width of 3 meters.
• Enter into input box "MDTD" 20000 vehicles per day. The emission
level Lm,E is calculated and displayed for the selected road type
"Federal Road" for day and night-time.

Road emission based on MDTD-data

* The emission for the evening period is zero as there is no emission

defined for this time interval in RLS-90.
• Close the dialog Road and select the receiver from the toolbox.
• Place a receiver perpendicular to the road’s axis and - while still being
in input mode - click on the receiver’s border with the right mouse but-
ton.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Specifying Road Emission 7.2 243

• Activate the option „Generate Rays (as Auxiliary Polygons)" on the Generate Rays
bottom of the receiver’s dialog.
• Start the calculation by click on the pocket calculator symbol on the
tool bar.

Road and receiver with rays as auxiliary polygons

The figure indicates that the road as a line source is segmented into sec-
tions, each of which is replaced by a point source in calculation. This oc-
curs for both emission lines separately.
Double-click at on the receiver to display the resulting day- and night-time
levels.

• Draw a calculation area around the road which includes the receiver Grid Calculation
point.
• Select the command Calc Grid from the Grid menu to calculate the
level grid.

Specifying the road emission based on a diurnal pattern requires to define Defining a Dirurnal
such a pattern first. Pattern

• Open the tables "Diurnal Pattern" on menu Tables|Libraries (local).

• Insert a new line via the table’s context menu (right mouse button).
• Double-click on the line to enter values.
• Enter a name and ID for the diurnal pattern.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

244
7.2 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Specifying Road Emission

• Click with the right mouse button into the column "Veh/h" and select
the command Change Column from the context menu. Enter for
„Arithmetic“ as new value 1000 and click OK.
• Proceed in the same way for the percentage of heavy goods vehicles
(HGV) in column "HGV (%)" by entering 20 %.
• Overwrite a section of the input value in the table (e.g. 6:00 h to 14:00
h) with 2000 vehicles/hour and with 8% for percentage HGV.

Diurnal pattern with hourly traffic data

* Diurnal patterns can be imported via the ODBC-interface in CadnaA.

Refer to chapter 9.5 ODBC-Import in this introductory manual.
• Close the dialog with OK and then click on the button "Close" in order
to close the table "Diurnal Pattern".
• Double-click the street and select from the list box „Road Type“ the
user-defined diurnal variation "T1" at the end of the list.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Specifying Road Emission 7.2 245

Selecting the diurnal pattern on dialog Road, Flist box „Road Type“

* The traffic counts of the diurnal variation are used as defined if an

MDTD of zero is entered. If a MDTD-value is entered, however, the
hourly traffic data of the diurnal pattern is normalized according to:

M DiurnalPattern
M applied = MDTDentered *
MDTDDiurnalPattern

A gradient (positive and/or negative slopes) influence the road’s emission. Specifying Road
Depending on the guideline a more or less detailed correction is used. In Gradient
RLS90 a gradient correction applies at absolute road gradients |g|>5 %
(i.e. also for downward gradients).
When entering a value into the list box "Road Gradient: Input (%)“ the
corresponding gradient correction according to the selected road noise
standard is considered. The correction applies to the entire road section. In
particular, it is independent from diverging height information at individu-
al polygon points - and subsequently gradients between those points -
points due to an existant terrain model.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

246
7.2 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Specifying Road Emission

Road Gradient auto With selection "Road Gradient: auto“ the gradients of roads modeled from
several sections are calculated automatically. In this case, in the displayed
emission level for the road (e.g. Lm,E with RLS 90) no gradient correction
is considered - as it varies from section to section. However, the correction
is calculated and taken into account in the calculation of propagation for
each road section separately.
On the list box "Gradient" the direction of traffic flow for the two outer la-
nes is specified. The abbreviations VA, AV, AA, and VV refer to the traffic
direction on the two lanes when looking from first to last point of the road.
Correction for With reflecting buildings at either sides of a road the level increase is con-
Multiple Reflections sidered according to RLS90 by the correction for multiple reflection Drefl.
In CadnaA this correction can be either entered directly or be calculated
based on the average height, the distance and the absorptive properties of
the parallel buildings.
• Enter a house parallel to the existing road (i.e. the former example).

* If you do not recall the sequence of commands when entering multi-

point objects, please check the chapter 4.2.1 Inserting Objects Using
the Mouse in this manual.

• Change to the edit mode and double-click on the building’s border.

• Click the button "geometry" and enter a height of 10 m (relative).
• Close both dialogs with OK.
• Duplicate the building by using the CTRL-key on your keyboard.

* To copy objects, please check the chapter 4.3.6 Copying Objects in

this manual.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Specifying Road Emission 7.2 247

• Proceed in same way to place three buildings at each side of the road.
• Finally, you can display the arrangement as a wire frame model in 3D-
view (command 3D-View on Options menu, setting „General Paral-
lel“).

3D-View (Options menu): road with 6 buildings

• Selects the command Calc Width of Roads (Tables|Miscellaneous

menu) to calculate the distance, average height and the gap proportion.
• Double-click on the road to open its edit dialog.

• Click on the blue info-symbol ( ) in the right upper corner of the dia-
log to open the Memo-Window.
The following parameters on the Memo-Window result for the left and the
right side of the road (left/right when looking from first to last point):
- DBEB_L/R: mean distance of buildings left/right
- HBEB_L/R: mean buildings height left/right
- LUECK_L/R: gap proportion left/right
Whether a correction for multiple reflections actually must be considered
or not depends on the gap proportion (only at gap proportions < 30% ac-
cording to RLS90).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

248
7.2 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Specifying Road Emission

To generate the mean values of the buildings height and distance from the
values for both sides of the road, proceed as follows:
• Close the Memo-Window and the dialog Road.
• Click into the white area of the screen and select the context menu
Modify Objects.
• Select action „Modify Attribute" for object type "Road" and click OK.
• On the dialog Modify Attribute select attribute HBEB from the list
box and enter in section „Arithmetic“ the follwoing expression:

(MEMO_HBEB_L+MEMO_HBEB_R)/2

Thus, the attribute HBEB is defined as the average of the values for
both road side.
• Click OK and confirm the action by „All“.
• From the road dialog it can be seen that an mean height of 10 m was
inserted - what wonder with all buildings being 10 m high.
Proceed in the same way to determine and assign the mean distances on
the left and on the right side:
• This time, select the attribute ABST on the dialog Modify Attribute
and enter following expression "arithmetically" in the area:

(MEMO_DBEB_L+MEMO_DBEB_R)/2

• Click OK and confirm the action by „All“ once again.

• From the road dialog it can be seen that a mean distance was calculated
from the present geometry.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Specifying Road Emission 7.2 249

CadnaA displays on dialog Road the correction for multiple reflections

Drefl corresponding to the input values automatically.

Displaying the correction for multiple reflections Drefl

based on mean distance and height of buildings left/right

• Update the calculation result by clicking the pocket calculator symbol.

• Save the file with a different file name, e.g. „road with parallel buil- Save File
dings.cna“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

250
7.2 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Specifying Road Emission

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Road with parallel Barrier 7.3 251

7.3 Road with parallel Barrier

Often parallel barriers are used to reduce thee sound impact by roads. Tho-
se barriers can easiyl be generated in CadnaA by the command Parallel
Object.
• Enter a road with three buildings on either seide or use the file "road Entering a Road
with parallel buildings.cna" from the previous chapter 7.2 Specifying
Road Emission.
• Select the command Object Snap (on Options menu) and enter there a
snap radius of 10 pixels.
When a building’s façade is located within this radius of the mouse click,
CadnaA catches the point at a distance of 0.05 m.

When calculating the receiving levels at buildings façades the „Distance Configuration|
Points-Façade“ on dialog Object Snap is related to the minimum distance Reflection
receiver-reflector as specified on the configuration-tab „Reflection“ (Cal-
culation|Configuration menu).

With the receiver distance from the facade is smaller than the minimum
distance receiver-reflector, no reflection by the own building is considered
on the level at this receiver point. Keep this setting on the configurations
for the time being.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

252
7.3 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Road with parallel Barrier

Placing Receivers • Deactivate the option "Generates Rays (as Aux. Polygons)“ on the
lower part of the dialog Receiver of the receiver point in the default
file "road with parallel buildings.cna".
• Select the object "Receiver" from the toolbox and click once on the
road side of each building located above the road. The default height of
the receivers is 4 meters.

• Zoom-in ( ) and measure using an auxiliary polygon ( ) to check

for the distance of the receivers 0.05 m in front of the façades.

Receivers attached to building facades

In a next step, the receiver levels shall be displayed in labels near to each
receiver:

• Switch to edit mode ( ) and click with the mouse into the white area
of the screen and select from the command Modify Objects from the
context menu.
• Select "Generate Label“ as action and as object type "Receiver".
• Click OK and select on dialog Generate Label from list box „Attri-
bute“ the attribute "LP1".
• After clicking OK and confirming by „All“ the level LP1 (daytime
value) will displayed in text boxes to the right of the receiver points.
In the next step, stations are defined alongside of the road to be used as re-
ference when entering the barrier.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Road with parallel Barrier 7.3 253

• Click with the right mouse button on the road’s axis and select from the Generate Stations
context menu the command Generate Station.
• Enter as the distance of stations 20 m to the right of the road (seen from
first to last point).

• Click on OK: Station marks are generated in steps of 20 m on the right

of the road.
In the next step a parallel barrier is placed for a defined range of stations Parallel Object:
on the left side of the road. Barrier

• Click with the right mouse button on the road’s axis and select the
command Parallel Object from the context menu.
• Enter distance of 5 m to the left of the road’s axis and a barrier height
(height offset) on the dialog of 4 m.
• Activate the option "Station Range" and enter - depending on the geo-
metry in your example - a range „from...to“. " of ... till ", which pro-
tects the receiver points with a lateral additional width which will
screen the receiver point from the road’s emission.

Parallel Object with Station Range (example)

• By use of an auxiliary polygon ( ) you may check that the barrier

was actually generated at a distance of 5 m from the road axis.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

254
7.3 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Road with parallel Barrier

• Start the calculation by a click on the pocket calculator symbol. The

sound levels displayed by the labels will be updated.

Receiver levels at building facades with a road-parallel barrier

Calculating the Grid In order to visualize the the screening effect by the barrier the horizontal
grid is calculated.

• Select the object "Calculation Area" (symbol: ) from the toolbox

and draw a rectangle which includes the road and all buildings.
• Enter on dialog Properties on the Grid menu a receiver spacing of 1
by 1 meter.
• Start the grid calculation by the command Calc Grid in Grid menu.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Road with parallel Barrier 7.3 255

When moving the mouse across the grid, CadnaA displays the current A-
weighted level on the status bar on the lower right (e.g. "L: 67.5").
In order to display the level inside a label at arbitrary positions on the grid Choose level boxes
use the object "Level box".

• Select the object "Level Box" (symbol ) from the toolbox.

• Click within the grid area to arbitrary positions to show the actual
sound level on a text box.

* When switching the performance parameter via the symbol bar from
day (LP1) to night (LP2), the level boxes on the grid will display the
night-time values while the level boxes at the facade receivers still
display the daytime values. This is due to the fact that when genera-
ting the labels for the facade receivers the daytime value (LP1) was
selected deliberately for display (action „Generate Label“).
Via grid arithmetics (Grid menu) a level difference grid can be generated Grid Arithmetics
showing the level difference without-with barrier to display the screening
effect on screen.
For details check the chapter 5.2.2 Grid Arithmetics in this introductory
manual.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

256
7.3 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Road with parallel Barrier

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Elevated Roads and Bridges 7.4 257

7.4 Elevated Roads and Bridges

In CadnaA bridges, viaducts, and other elevated roadway constructions
are modeled by assigning the relative height to the road’s axis at every
point or as absolute height and activating the option "self-screening" of the
road object. The width of the self-screening bridge plate includes the road
width and additional sidewalk etc.

Elevated road with barrier to the left with „Self-Screening“ activated

• Select the object "Road" from the toolbox and enter a straight road sec- Entering an
tion from two polygon points. elevated Road
• In edit mode - recognized by the road symbol attached to the mouse
pointer - the road dialog can be opened by clicking with the right
mouse button on the road axis.
• Enter a road width of 5 m, MDTD of 15000 vehicles/day and click on
the button "Geometry".

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

258
7.4 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Elevated Roads and Bridges

• Specify a relative road height 10 m above the ground (default: 0 m).

• Close the dialogs Geometry and Road by OK.
Vertical Grid • Select the object "Vertical Grid" (symbol ) from the toolbox.
• Draw a line from two polygon points perpendicular to the road axis,
approximately in the middle of the road section.

Road with vertical grid (projected into xy-plane)

• Switch to the edit mode (symbol ).

• Double-click on the vertical grid to open its dialog.
• Deactivate the options "global" and specify a receiver spacing of 1 by 1
m and select the representation type "Lines of Equal Sound Level".
• By clicking the button "Calculate" the calculation is engaged and the
resulting vertical grid displayed.
• Click with the mouse into the lower part of the dialog - where the grid
is shown - and zoom in the vertical grid using the mouse wheel.
As can be evaluated from the representation the road - being a parametric
line source - is radiating to both sides. Thus, the road’s surface is not con-
sidered as screening surface by default.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Elevated Roads and Bridges 7.4 259

* The two emission lines are located 0.5 m above the height entered for
the road itself.

Vertical grid: elevated road not being self-screening

• Close the dialog Vertical Grid and double-click again on the road axis.
• Click the button "Geometry".
The option "Self-Screening" is activated on the road’s Geometry dialog. Activating
Additional width and barrier heights can be defined separately for the left Self-Screening
and right side. The additional width equals the distance of the outer dif-
fracting edge ("bridge' edge") to the axis of the outer lane.
• Activate the option "Self-screening" and enter an additional width 4 of
meters for the left and the right side.
• Close the dialogs Geometry and Road by OK.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

260
7.4 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Elevated Roads and Bridges

Instead of the former additional width (per side of the street 1.75 m, see di-
alog Options|Appearance, „Road“) the additional width is now based on
the self-screening definition. Using an auxiliary polygon you can measure
that the perpendicular distance from the dotted emission line to the road’s
curb is 4 m an either sides. Consider, as the additional width from the self-
screening definition determines the radiated pattern it supersedes the addi-
tional width defined on the dialog Appearance (Options menu).
• Double-click on the vertical grid and restart the calculation.

Vertical grid: elevated road with self-screening activated

The resulting grid illustrates the self-screening effect: The bridge's edge is
considered as a diffracting edge upon recalculation.
Enter the Barrier’s • Again, open the dialog Geometry of the road and enter a barrier height
Height on the left of 5 meters.
• Close both dialogs and start the grid calculation from the dialog Verti-
cal Grid.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Elevated Roads and Bridges 7.4 261

Vertical grid: self-screening elevated road with barrier (parapet) on the left side

In conjunction with the feature „Self-Screening“ it has to be considered just the own source
that, both, the additional width and the parapet/s are just ssen by the own is seen
source (i.e. the road having this option activated). For other sources - besi-
des the road in question - the road’s plate is not seen as a screening sur-
face. This will be illustrated in the following.
• Open the road’s dialog and change the MDTD to zero vehicles per day.
• Enter a point source at a height of 10 m aside of the road and in the line
of the vertical grid Specify an A-weighted sound power level of 100
dB(A).
• Open the vertical grid and start the calculation.
The result indicates by the lines of equal sound level propagating unaffec-
ted across the road’s plate that the self-screening option activated for the
road is not relevant for the sound propagation of the point source.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

262
7.4 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Elevated Roads and Bridges

Vertical grid: self-screening elevated road with no emssion and a point source

Dialog Modify The values required in conjunction with the definition of self-screening
Objects property can also be changed via dialog Modify Objects, action Modify
Attributes. For this, proceed as follows:
• Click with the mouse into the white screen area and select the com-
mand Modify Objects from the context menu.
• Select from the list of actions the option „Modify Attribute“ and as
object type „Road".
• After click on OK the dialog Modify Attribute is displayed.
• The following attributes can be selected from the attribute list to
address new values:
- SSCR_ADDWID: Half of the value assigned here is the distance
from the outer diffracting edge to the corresponding road axis (i.e.
additional widths left/right are numerically equal).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Elevated Roads and Bridges 7.4 263

- SSCR_AW_L: This value is the distance from the outer diffracting

edge on the left to the utmost road axis on the left (= additional width
to the left).
- SSCR_AW_R: This value is the distance from the outer diffracting
edge on the right to the utmost road axis on the right (= additional
width to the right).
- SSCR_H_L: height of the barrier’s upper edge above the road plane,
to the left.
- SSCR_H_R: height of the barrier’s upper edge above the road plane,
to the right.

Definition of the additional widths left/right

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

264
7.4 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Elevated Roads and Bridges

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Wall Optimization 7.5 265

7.5 Wall Optimization

CadnaA enables to determine automatically the required height of a noise
barrier in order to respect a predefined limiting level using an iterative op-
timization calculation strategy. The object "Embankment" and not the
"Barrier" must be used for this wall optimization, due to the internal object
structure required. The embankments may be replaced with barriers when
the calculations are optimized. To execute a wall optimization it is manda-
torily that a limiting level is assigned to the receiver points. The limiting
level can either be enter directly or may be extracted from areas of desig-
nated use.
In the following example a noise barrier alongside of a road shall be opti-
mized. This applies in the same way for other line sources (e.g. line sour-
ce, railroad).
• Enter a road with the following emission data. The remaining input Entering Objects
values on the dialog Road are kept.
- road width: 3 meters,
- MDTD = 10000 vehicles/24
• Enter a house on a side of the road having a height of 10 meters.
• Select the command Object Snap (Options menu) and enter a snap
radius of 10 pixels with a distance points-facade of 0.05 m
• Enter a receiver at the building’s facade facing the road.
• Double-click on the receiver point: The option „Determine from Areas
of Land Use" is activated by default. Select from list box „Use Stan-
dard Values for“ the option „Road".
• Define an area of land use around the building so that the receiver point Defining Areas of
is surrounded by the area (symbol: ). Land Use

• Double-click on the border of the area of land use and select from the
list box „Land Use“ the option „WA Allgemeines Wohngebiet“ (in
English: residential area).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

266
7.5 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Wall Optimization

With this setting the reference values as defined on dialog Land Use for
road noise (Options menu) apply.

* You may add your own definitions to the list of land uses. On dialog
Land Use click into an empty line in column „Land Use“ and enter
corresponding limiting values for each noise type.
• Start the calculation by a click on the pocket calculator symbol on the
symbol bar.
Subsequently, the receiver point’s color switches to (performance parame-
ter: day = LP1). This means that the limiting value assigned to the receiver
is exceeded for the day time period.

Limiting value for the receiver at the building exceeded

* If the receiver’s color does not turn to red, either the area of land use
is missing or the sound pressure level at the receiver is too low in
your case. Correct for this if necessary.
Parallel Object: In the next step an embankment as a parallel object to the road is genera-
Embankment ted.
• Select from the context menu of the road the command Parallel
Object.
• Choose the object type „Embankment" and activate the option „Left
from active Object“.
• Enter a distance of 5 m and a height offset of zero.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Wall Optimization 7.5 267

Dialog Parallel Object: generate parallel embankment

• Double-click on the embankment and enter a slope of 1:0.

* By the slope of 1:0 a vertical embankment is predefined. The height

is not entered since this is calculated on optimization.
• Select from the context menu of the embankment the command Break
into pieces and enter 10 meters for the length of each piece.
• Select from the Options menu the command 3D-View.
• Change the type of view to "General parallel" and choose a suitable
angle of view by typing the left/right arrow keys on your keyboard.

• Now, click the symbol for the wall optimization ( ).

• Keep the default optimization parameters (element height: 0.5 m, max.
number of elements: 20). This corresponds to a maximum barrier
height of 10 meters.
• Start the wall optimization with OK.
At first, CadnaA checks whether the limiting value is kept at the embank-
ment’s maximum height. The optimization is continued only if this is the
case. Subsequently, with each iteration step there is a check to determine
which of the embankment sections yields the highest level reduction. This
optimal section is then considered in the next iteration step.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

268
7.5 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Wall Optimization

Finally, the optimization result is displayed graphically on fialog 3D-View.

Result of the wall optimization

The table Embankment (Tables|Obstacles menu) lists the height of each

section.

Table Embankment listing the section heights

• Move the dialog Embankment so that the road becomes fully visible.
When clicking in a line of the table, the respective embankment section
is highlighted.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Pass-By Level 7.6 269

7.6 Pass-By Level

In CadnaA, the time signal of the sound pressure level at a receiver point
due to the pass-by of an individual vehicle with a predefined emission can
be calculated for roads - but also for railways or line sources.
Via the time signal it can be assessed - for example:
• whether a noise mitigation measure (e.g. a barrier) causes a sufficient
level reduction,
• the level reduction due to an absorptive cladding of a reflecting façade
of a building, or
• the amount the resulting level of vehicles passing by is reduced when
an ordinary road is converted into a speed-reduced zone.
In the following example the pass-by level at a building’s façade is exami-
ned.
• Enter a road with several polygon points with the following emission Entering Objects
data:
- road width: 5 meters,
- MDTD = 20000 vehicles/24 h
• Enter a building with a height of 10 meters on a side of the road.
• Select the command Object Snap (Options menu) and enter a distance
of 0.05 m and a snap radius of 10 pixels.
• Insert a receiver at the lateral side of the building.
• Name the receiver point by RCVR 1.

• Start the calculation by clicking on the pocket calculator symbol ( ).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

270
7.6 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Pass-By Level

Building alongside of a road with a receiver partially screened by the building

Calculating the • Click with the right mouse button on the road axis and select the com-
Pass-by-Level mand Pass-by Level from the context menu.
The dialog Pass-by Level is opened. The level during a pass-by depends
on:
- the select receiver point,
- the source type (car, truck), and
- the speed (km/h).
Since just one receiver point is available in the example, this is selected
automatically.
• Select the entry „light" from the list box „Source Type“.
The speed dependant sound power levels of an individual vehicle in dB(A)
are based on the emission data of RLS 90.
• Enter 4 meters as length of the source.
• Keep the speed of 100 km/h and the sampling time of 0.1 s (interval
between the individual positions of the source).
• Click on the button OK to display the time dependant pass-by level.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Pass-By Level 7.6 271

Passs-by Level at a receiver partially screened

• Clicking the button "Animate" starts the animation at different speeds

(default speed="1x").
CadnaA displays the level at each sampling position along the road in the
dialog’s title.
• Click after finalization of the animation into the level diagram with the
mouse.
• By moving the mouse cursor within the window the levels at a certain
time can be displayed.
With this example, the level rises at the receiver point until the closest ap-
proach of the source and decreases due to the screening effect caused by
the building’s edge.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

272
7.6 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Pass-By Level

Auralisation The sound during a pass-by can be heard through a loudspeaker connected
to the computer.
• Click on the dialog Pass-By Level on the command Auralisation|Pro-
perties.
• Select as an acoustic source type "Road".
• Activate the option "3D-Auralisation". In this case, the Doppler effect
is included with vehicles approaching and departing.

• Keep the settings for „Listening Direction at Receiver“ and click OK.
• Start the animation at default speed (1x) by clicking on the menu item
Animation.
The animation is started while the signal at receiver 1 is reproduced via
loudspeaker (and the audio output connector of your PC).
Record Video The change of the level grid when the source is moving can be saved as a
video file and replayed with a suitable software later on (e.g. MS-Win-
dows Media Player).

• Define a calculation area (symbol ) around the road and the buil-
ding with the receiver point.

• In addition, define a section (symbol ) around the calculation area

and name it "A1".
• Specify a grid spacing of 2 by 2 meter (menu Grid|Properties).
• Again, select the command Pass-by Level from the context menu of
the road, enter again a length of 4 meters and keep all other settings.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Pass-By Level 7.6 273

• Select the section "A1" in the lower part („Video-Options“) of the dia-
log and click on the button "Video".
• Enter a name for the video file to be generated (e.g. "road_1") and click
OK.
• Select from the listed video codecs (e.g. Microsoft Video 1) and click
OK.

* The contents of the list depends on the video codecs installed on your
PC. Some codecs are per default available on MS-Windows opera-
ting systems (e.g. Microsoft Video 1).
CadnaA starts the grid calculation for every sampling position of the sour-
ce and saves the moving grid as a frame in the video file.
• Double-click on the video file in the respective directory to replay it.

Two video-frames with a moving source and a building

Information on further options available on the dialog Pass-By Level ple- Further Options
ase refer to the CadnaA-Reference Manual, chapter 2.14 Pass-by Levels
for Line Sources with the Noise Level’s Time History.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

274
7.6 Chapter 7 - Modeling Roads
Pass-By Level

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways 275

Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways

For the modeling of the sound propagation of railway lines the object Rail-
way is available in the CadnaA-toolbox:

Object Railway
on the CadnaA-toolbox

In this chapter the German railway guideline Schall03 is used as the calcu-
lation method for railways (see tab „Country“ on dialog Configuration).
The following topics are dealt with:
• entering and editing railways,
• defining, importing, and addressing of lists with train numbers,
• railways on bridges.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

276 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways 277

8.1 Entering & editing of railroads

The emission of the source "railway" depends on the selected railway noi-
se standard (menu Calculation|Configuration, source group „Railway“).
It is presupposed hereinafter that the guideline "Schall03" is chosen for
"Germany (TA Lärm)" as a country or - with setting „(user defined)“ - the
guideline „Schall03“ was selected. If necessary please, check this.
In this example a straight railway track with two lanes having each a traf- Entering a Railway
fic of 20 local trains during the day and 6 during the night period are used. Track

• Select the object „Railway“ from the toolbox.

• Select a scale of 1:1000 and click with the mouse to enter the first poly-
gon point of the railway.
• Move the mouse to the right and clicking at a second location.
• Click the right mouse button to exit the input mode.
• Change to the edit mode by clicking the arrow object in the left top
corner of the toolbox.
• Double-click with the mouse on the railway’s axis. The edit dialog
Railway (for Schall03) opens.

Edit dialog Railway (here for Schall03)

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

278 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways

Specifying Emission The emission of railways is alternatively defined by:

• The emission level Lm,E for the time periods day/night, and - if neces-
sary - the evening period or
• by referring to a local or global list „Numbers of Trains“ specifying the
counts per train class during Day/Night, and - if required - Evening.

* The present railway guidelines produce for the time being just emis-
sions in the time periods day and night. Via the option „Use Non-
Standard Reference Time D/E/N = 12/4/8 (see Ref.Time Tab)“ the
calculation can be extended to three time periods D/E/N.
Emission Level Lm,E The emission level Lm,E can either be entered for periods Day/Evening/
Night as a numerical value via the dialog Railway or be imported alterna-
tively (see chapter 9.5 ODBC-Import).
Local List To edit the local list „Number of Trains“ for the railway selected proceed
„Numbers of Trains“ as follows:
• Activate the option „Train Classes and Penalties“ on the dialog Rail-
way.
On the upper right of the dialog Railway, the selection „Train Classes“ is
provided. By default, the local list is selected. In this case the input of traf-
fic numbers occurs on the present dialog.

Adding a train class to the local list „Number of Trains“

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways 279

• Click with the right mouse button into the list and select from the con-
text menu the command Insert after.
• Double-click in the new table line.
• Select the local train „N Nahverkehrszug“ in the list box "Train Type"
and enter the numbers of trains (day = 20 trains, evening = 0 trains ,
night = 6 trains).

Input number of trains Day/Night

• Upon closing of the dialog Railway:Train Class with OK the emission

is displayed with the respective Lm,E on dialog Railway as for day and
night.

Dialog Railway after inserting local train numbers

• Now, close the dialog Railway.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

280 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways

Parallel Track • Click with the right mouse button on the railway track and select the
command Parallel Object from the context menu.

• Select the object type "Railway", enter a distance of 6 meters to the

right and click OK.
• Change to the edit mode .
• Double-click on the new, parallel railway track and check whether the
emission data was copied correctly from the original railway.
Configuration| With selection of the guideline Schall03 the option „stricly accord. to
Tab „Railroad“ Schall03“ is automatically activated. This means that
- only the 1st order of reflection is considered (whatever was specified
for „max. Order of Reflection“ on tab "Reflection"),
- the railway correction of 5 dB taken into account, and
- no lateral diffraction and no attenuation due to foliage is calculated.

Emission Level Lm,E The emission level Lm,E according to Schall03 is the average level at a dis-
tance of 25 from the railway's axis and in 3.5 m height above the rail's top
edge and considers:
- the basic emission data per train class,
- the correction for the type of track,
- the corrections for bridge, grade crossing and curve radius,
- the correction for multiple reflections,
- the speed correction.
Per default, all corrections are 0 dB.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways 281

• Close the dialog Railway and select the receiver point from the tool- Entering a Receiver
box.
• Enter a receiver aside of the railway track and click in edit mode on the
receiver’s border with the right mouse button.
• Activate on the lower part of the dialog the option „Generate Rays (as Generate Rays
Aux. Polygons)“.
• Start the calculation by click on the pocket calculator symbol on the
symbol bar.

Tracks and receiver point with ray representation {account}

It is obvious from the representation that the two railway tracks, each rep-
resenting a line source, are segmented into sections. Every segment is re-
placed by a point source.
• When double-clicking to the receiver the daytime and the night-time
levels are displayed.
When combining industrial noise with road noise in an assessment it has to
be considered that the partial level for railway noise already contains the
railway correction of 5 dB (see Calculation|Configuration menu, tab
„Railway“). The energetic addition of the partial levels for commercial
and industrial noise, therefore, leads to a total level which could be regar-
ded as result for an overall assessment.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

282 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways

Defining a • Select the object „Calculation Area“ (symbol ) from the toolbox
Calculation Area and define a calculation area including and the receiver.
• Adjust the grid spacing to 1x1 meter (menu Grid|Properties).
• Calculate the grid (menu Grid|Calc Grid).
• Use the object „Level Box“ (symbol ) to display the level at indivi-
dual locations on the grid.

Level grid (daytime) for a railway track with two lanes

Defining a Parallel • Click with the right mouse button on the - in this example - upper rail-
Barrier way track and select the command Parallel Object from the context
menu.
• On dialog Parallel Object, enter a distance (aside of the railway's axis)
of 3 m and a height difference of 5.4 m.

* Since the source height of the railway is set automatically to 0.6 m

above the rail’s top edge, the height of the barrier’s top edge is loca-
ted at 0.6 + 5.4 = 6 meter.

* The option "Station Range" enables to restrict the barrier’s length to a

range of stations.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways 283

• Recalculate the grid (menu Grid|Calc Grid).

Level grid (daytime) for a railway track with parallel barrier

• Select the object "Vertical Grid" from the toolbox (symbol ). Vertical Grid
• Draw a line from two polygon points perpendicular to the railway track
(approximately in the middle of its length).

• Switch to the edit mode (symbol ).

• Double-click the vertical grid to open its dialog.
• Deactivate the option „Global“ for the grid representation and set it to
„Lines of the Equal Sound Level“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

284 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways

• Click the button „Calculate“ in dialog Vertical Grid.

• Click after completion of calculation with the mouse into the lower
part window and zoom in the vertical grid using the mouse wheel.

Vertical grid, grid appearance „Lines of the Equal Sound Level“

From the graphics it becomes obvious that the emission lines are above the
terrain’s level. On dialog Railway|Geometry it can be checked that the
source height is set by CadnaA to 0.6 m above terrain automatically (i.e.
the rail’s top edge).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Creating & Addressing Lists with „Number of Trains“ 8.2 285

8.2 Creating & Addressing Lists with

„Number of Trains“
Editing the list of train numbers for each railway track locally, however, is
tedious since, every time, the same numbers of trains would have to be
reentered for any track section where the type of track or other corrections
(e.g. bridge, grade crossing and curve radius) change.
But, lists with train numbers can be defined in the local library of CadnaA
(menu Tables|Libraries (local)|Number of Trains). These lists can be as-
signed to each railway track. When changing the number of trains in the li-
brary all respective railway tracks will be updated automatically.
In this section the editing, the import and addressing is explained by lists
with train numbers with the help of example data. At first, a text file is pro-
duced, having a specific format, with numbers of trains.
The data per track consist of at least three line: Data Structure
1st line: name of the list with number trains (e.g. designation of track)
2nd line:train class|number_Day|number_Evening|number_Night|
speed|train_length|percentage_disc_brakes%|
type_correction_Dfz|selection_traintype
3rd line: blank (as a separating line between tracks)

* The parameters in the 2nd line have to be separated from each other
by the tabulator key (TAB).

* Number of trains for additional train classes are inserted after the 2nd
line as additional lines.

* The last two parameters in the 2nd line just apply to calculations
using the Germain railway nosie guideline Schall03 (otherwise set
values to zero).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

286
8.2 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Creating & Addressing Lists with „Number of Trains“

Generating a List The following list with numbers of trains shall be imported:
with Numbers of
track_001
Trains
ICE 16 0 0 100 420 100.0 -3.0 1
EC 13 0 2 100 340 94.0 0.0 6
track_002
IR 14 0 1 120 205 90.0 0.0 0
D/FD 0 0 4 120 340 30.0 0.0 0

• Enter these figures into a MS-Word file or into a text editor and save
the file as a text file (file extension *.txt). The individual parameters
are to be separated by the tabulator key (TAB).
The text file will now look like this:

Text file with number of trains for two tracks

Importing the Num- • In CadnaA, select New from the File menu.
bers of Trains
• On the File menu, select command Import and from the list of file
types „Number of Trains (*.txt)“.
• Select the previous text file by clicking its name once and click the but-
ton „Options“.
Number of trains can be imported either to the local list on the dialog Rail-
way or into the local library Number of Trains.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Creating & Addressing Lists with „Number of Trains“ 8.2 287

• Select for „Object Type“ the option „Numbers of Trains“ with the
check-box „Append non-existing Objects“ activated.

Options for import of number of trains

• Close the dialog and click the „Open“-button on the dialog Import
Number of Trains.
• Open the imported list with number of trains via the menu Tables|
Libraries (local)|Number of Trains.
Thus, the numbers of trains for two tracks have been imported. The indica-
ted emission level Lm,E considers all types of trains running on this track.

Imported number of trains for two tracks

• Double-click onto the first table item „track_001“.

Railways classes and numbers for track_001

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

288
8.2 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Creating & Addressing Lists with „Number of Trains“

Addressing the Now, the numbers of trains shall be assigned to two railway tracks.
Numbers of Trains
• Enter two railway tracks into the file for which the number of trains
have been imported.
• Define the ID’s of both tracks, the first track’s ID "track_001" and the
second tracks’s ID "track_002".

Railway track with new ID, but without number of trains

• Click in the white screen area with the right mouse button and select
from the conext menu the command Modify Objects.
• Select the action „Change Attributes“ and the object type „Railway“.
• Click OK.
• Select on the dialog Modify Attribute the attribute "LIBZZ" from the
upper list box.

* The abbreviation „LIBZZ“ stands for ’Library Numbers of Trains’

and refers to the designation in the library „Number of Trains“.
• Select the option „Replace Strings“ and delete the present entry „\1“ in
line „Replace with“.
• Click on the double arrow symbol .
• Select the attribute "ID" from the sub-menu (in the upper left corner).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Creating & Addressing Lists with „Number of Trains“ 8.2 289

Subsequently, the string "{ID}" is written into the input box „Replace
with“. The parentheses indicate that not the text string "ID" is becoming
the new string, but the value of the attribute ID.

Replacing the attribute LIBZZ by the ID-value

• After OK confirm the operation with „all“.

• Double-click on both railway tracks, one after another.
The railway track with ID „track_001“" got the number of trains assigned
of „track_001“ in the library Numbers of Trains, and the railway track
„Track__002“ those of „track_002“.

Number of Trains „track_002“ assigned

• Save the file e.g. with filename „railway.cna“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

290
8.2 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Creating & Addressing Lists with „Number of Trains“

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Railroads on Bridges 8.3 291

8.3 Railroads on Bridges

The sound radiation by railway tracks on bridges or viaducts can be mo-
deled in CadnaA by use of the option „Self-Screening“. This option is
available on the Geometry dialog of the object „Railway“.

Dialog Geometry (via dialog Railway)

With the option „Self-Screening“ activated the following values can be en-
tered:
• additional width left/right (to consider the bridge plate's edge),
• parapet height left/right (located at the plate’s edge), and
• a stationing.
The use is explained by an example in the following.
• Set the scale to 1:2000 and select the „Railway“ from the toolbox. Entering an elevated
Railway Track
• Enter via keyboard the first pair of coordinates:
(x1, y1) = (100, 900)
• Enter via keyboard the second pair of coordinates:
(x2, y2) = (300, 900)

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

292
8.3 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Railroads on Bridges

• Finalize the input procedure by clicking the right mouse button.

• Enter a relative height of the railway track of 10.6 meters above to the
ground (via button „Geometry“ in the edit dialog Railway).

* The entered height refers to the rail's top edge.

• Close the Geometry and the Railway dialog by OK.

• Enter an emission level of Lm,E = 70 dB(A) for the daytime period.

Vertical Grid • Select the object „Vertical Grid“ from the toolbox (symbol ).
• Draw a line from two polygon points perpendicular to the railway's
axis, approximately in the middle of the track’s length.

• Change to the edit mode (toolbox symbol ).

Railway track and vertical grid (in xy-plane)

• On a double-click on the vertical grid the dialog opens.

• For „Specification“ and „Appearance“, deactivate the option „global“
and set the grid spacing to 1x1 meter and the appearance to „Lines of
Equal Sound Level“.
• Now, click „Calculate“.
• Click once with the mouse into the lower part of the dialog and zoom
in or out the vertical grid using the mouse wheel.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Railroads on Bridges 8.3 293

It is obvious from the representation that the railway track emits to all si-
des. Thus, the track is not seen as a screening surface by default.

Vertical grid: elevated railway track with self-screening deactivated

• Close the dialog Vertical Grid and double-click onto the railway track
once more.
• Click the button „Geometry“.

The option „Self-Screening“ is activated on the dialog Geometry. Additi- Activating

onal widths and barrier heights can defined for the left and right side of the Self-Screening
railway track. The additional width corresponds to the distance of the outer
diffracting edge ("bridge' edge") from the railway's axis.
• Activate the option „Self-Screening“ and keep the default additional
width of 2 meters on either sides left/right.
• Close the dialogs Geometry and Railway.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

294
8.3 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Railroads on Bridges

• Double-click on the vertical grid and start the calculation by click on

button „Calculation“.

Vertical grid: elevated railway track with self-screening activated

As can be seen from the resulting vertical grid the diffracting edge is defi-
ned by the additional width entered.
Specifying a Furthermore, on dialog Geometry, the length of a parallel barrier (parapet)
Parapet by Stations can be restricted to a certain part of the railway track using the option
„from/to Station“. As an example, two buildings are entered serving as
bridgeheads.
• Select the object „Building“ from the toolbox.
• Enter the following coordinate points via the keyboard after each other:
(x1, y1) = (100, 825)
(x2, y2) = (150, 825)
(x3, y3) = (150, 975)
(x4, y4) = (100, 975)

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Railroads on Bridges 8.3 295

• Click with the right mouse button on the building’s border in order to
select the command Transformation from the context menu and sub-
sequently the option „Rotation + Translation“.
• Enter a translation of 150 m in x-direction and activate the option
„Keep Original“.

Transforming a copy of the building

• Select from the railway’s context menu the command Generate Stati- Generating Stations
ons.
• Specify a distance of stations of 25 m aligned to the right side of the
objects and click OK.

Distance of stations 25 m, right alignment

• Open dialog Geometry via the dialog Railway. Specfying Stations

for the Parapet
• Activate the option „from Station“ and enter a value of 75 meters.
• Activate the option „to Station“ and enter a value of 125 meters.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

296
8.3 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Railroads on Bridges

Station range for parallel parapet (barrier)

Definition of a • Select the object Calculation Area (symbol: ) from the toolbox and
Calculation Area draw a rectangle around the objects entered.
• Calculate the horizontal grid (menu Grid|Calc Grid).

Horizontal grid: elevated railway track & parapet with stations

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Railroads on Bridges 8.3 297

By restricting the parapet’s length to the bridged part of the railway track,
the grid levels to the left of the bridge (upper half of the grid) are determi-
ned by the path difference across the barrier’s upper edge. The sound emit-
ted by the railway sections on the bridgeheads is diffracted by the
respective edge of the building which considers the bridge plate as a scree-
ning object as well.
The self-screening effect by the railroad track - including parapets, if any - Only of own Source
refers just to this source itself (i.e. just to this railway track). For more in- is seen
formation please refer to chapter 7.4 Elevated Roads and Bridges in this
manual.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

298
8.3 Chapter 8 - Modeling Railways
Railroads on Bridges

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import 299

Chapter 9 - Data Import

CadnaA offers extensive features to import the object’s geometry and data
from various file formats.
In view of the variety of import formats, only the procedure for the most
relevant and frequent formats can be explained in the context of this intro-
ductory manual. This includes:
• import of bitmaps as background images (including GoogleEarth™),
• geometry import from DXF-files,
• import of geometry and data from Shape-files (ESRI-ArcGIS),
• import of data from MS-Excel worksheets via ODBC.
The procedures to be used are presented in the following by examples.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

300 Chapter 9 - Data Import

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import 301

9.1 Import & Calibration of Bitmaps

* The features described in this section require the CadnaA-option
BMP enabling bitmap processing.
Bitmaps serve as a background graphic when entering sources, obstacles
and receiver points. In those cases, the object coordinates are not available
as digital data but may be defined by drawing the objects onto the back-
ground. This feature enables to make use of scanned plans or maps (e.g.
from land register), but also of photographs serving as background.

* The bitmap file itself is not saved within the CadnaA-file. The Cad-
naA-file, however, contains a reference to the file via its file path.

It is mandatory for the to-scale insertion of a bitmap file that one of the fol-
lowing data is at least available:
1. coordinate pairs (x,y) for the bottom left and the top right corner,
2. coordinate pair (x,y) for bottom left corner, the resolution in dpi
("dots per inch") and the original scale (1: X),
3. at least two matching points (located within the bitmap with well-
known coordinates) assuming translation deformation, or
4. at least three matching points with a shear deformation of the bitmap.
The bitmap files used in the following examples are available for down- File Download
load at:
http://download.datakustik.de/download/bmp1.zip
http://download.datakustik.de/download/bmp2.zip
Decompress the files after download. Free test version of WinZip is down-
loadable at:
http://www.winzip.com

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

302 Chapter 9 - Data Import

Example 1 The bitmap-file bmp1.jpg is an extract from a land register. It is orienta-

ted vs. North and shows a scaling bar.

The scaling bar has a length of 25 m. Thus, the relative, orthogonal coordi-
nates of two points are known:
(x1,y1) = (0,0) and (x2,y2) = (25,0).

• Select the bitmap-symbol from the toolbox and draw an area.

As no bitmap-file has been referenced so far the frame just contains the de-
fault bitmap-symbol.
• Open the bitmap’s edit dialog (in input mode) by clicking on the border
with the right mouse button.
• Select the bitmap-file to be imported bmp1.jpg using the file selector
symbol.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import 303

Selecting the bitmap-file

After selection of the file the entire path is displayed in box „File“.

* A bitmap-file is, however, found in any case - independent of the file

path addressed - if it resident in the same directory as the project file
(file extension *.cna).

The present coordinates for the two corners apply to the drawn area of the
bitmap-symbol.
• Click on button „Calibrate Bitmap“.
• On dialog Calibrate Bitmap, the option „Reference Point 2“ is selec-
ted by default.
• Now, enter the x-coordinate of the second reference point as shown in
the next figure.
The other coordinates are all zero and need not to be changed therefore.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

304 Chapter 9 - Data Import

Coordinates for two reference points

• After having defined the coordinates click on OK.

On a further dialog, CadnaA displays the bitmap and prompts you to spe-
cify the position of the first reference point. When moving with the mouse
arrow across the bitmap you will realize a fiducial mark attached to the
mouse arrow.

Symbol for the fiducial mark

* The hotspot is the mouse’ arrow head and not the center point of the
fiducial mark.
• Click onto the zero meter point on the scaling bar in order to enter the
first reference point.
• If necessary make use of the magnifier feature to enlarge a section of
the bitmap.
Now, CadnaA prompts you to specify the second reference point.
• Click at the 25 m point on the scaling bar to introduce the second refe-
rence point.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import 305

Defining the second reference point at (x2,y2) = (25,0)

After input of the last reference point a further dialog displays the RMS-
error and the standard deviation of the calibrating procedure. For bitmaps
with two reference points the error with an orthogonal transformation is
zero.
• Click OK and enter a new file name for the calibrated file (e.g.
bmp1_cal.jpg).
• Now, click the OK-button in the Bitmap dialog.
The bitmap is imported, but may be out off the screen area as it’s location
is outside the present screen area of the CadnaA-main window.
• In case this applies, select the command Limits on the Options menu.
• On the dialog Limits click the button "Calc" and close the dialog by
OK.

• Click the symbol on the toolbox to display the entire limits.

• By use of an auxiliary polygon you may check whether the scaling bar
actually has actually a length of 25 m.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

306 Chapter 9 - Data Import

Example 2 In this example the bitmap-file bmp2.bmp having a shear deformation is

imported to scale using three match points.

Bitmap with three match point-coordinates

If you intend to import a file with an unknown distortion use at least three
match points.
• If necessary select the command New from the File menu.

• Draw an area after selection of the bitmap symbol from the tool-
box.
• Open the edit dialog (in the edit mode) by a right mouse click on the
border of the bitmap symbol.
• Select via the file selector symbol the bitmap file bmp2.bmp to be
imported.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import 307

Upon selection of the file the entire file path and the file name is displayed
in the box "File". The coordinates displayed right now apply to the two po-
lygon points of the arbitrary area of the bitmap symbol.
• Click the button „Calibrate Bitmap“.
• In the dialog „Calibrate Bitmap“ activate the radio button at "Refe-
rence Point 3" to enable the input of three reference points.
• Enter the coordinates of the three reference points as shown in a follo-
wing figure.

Coordinates for three reference points

* It is recommended to adhere a certain sequence when defining the

reference points (e.g. clockwise) in order to be able to remember the
sequence of points more easily - if it is not put down in the bitmap
file already.
• Click after input of the reference point coordinates on OK.
CadnaA displays the bitmap and prompts to enter the position of the first
reference point.
• Click on the location which was entered as the first reference point.
• If necessary use the magnifying glass to zoom to a part of the bitmap.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

308 Chapter 9 - Data Import

CadnaA prompts you to enter the positions of the two further reference
points.
• Click at the location which was entered as the second reference point.
• Further, click at the location which was entered as the third reference
point.

Defining the third reference point

After input of the last reference point the RMS-error and the standard de-
viation of the calibrating procedure are displayed. For bitmaps non-trans-
latory distortion - as in this case - the error applying an translatory
transformation is, for sure, larger as with an affine transformation.

RMS-error and standard deviation of the calibrating procedure

(applying orthogonal or affine transformation)

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import 309

• Click OK with the a affine transformation selected and enter a new file
name for the calibrated file (e.g. bmp2_cal.bmp).
• Click OK on the dialog Bitmap.
• If the bitmap is out off the screen area select the command Limits on
the Options menu.
• Click the button "Calc" and close the dialog by OK.

• Select the symbol from the toolbox to display the entire limits.
• Using an auxiliary polygon you may check whether the distances bet-
ween the locations having served as match points correspond to the dif-
ferences of the respective coordinates in x and y direction.
Bitmaps are also listed in the tables.
• Select from the Tables menu the sub-entry Miscellaneous|Bitmap.

Bitmap table (menu Tables|Miscellaneous)

As CadnaA saves this calibration data with the file the location of the
bitmap has not to be recalibrated when reopening the file. The calibrated
bitmap enables to draw objects - like buildings and roads - on top of the
bitmap serving as background.

* The imported bitmap file is projected to the ground in 3D-Special

view.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

310 Chapter 9 - Data Import

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
Importing Bitmap from GoogleEarth™ 9.2 311

9.2 Importing Bitmap from GoogleEarth™

* The features described in this section require the CadnaA-option
BMP enabling bitmap processing.
CadnaA offers the possibility of importing geo-referenced bitmaps from
GoogleEarth™. The view in Google Earth™ determines the resolution of
the bitmap. It is prerequisite that the recent version of GoogleEarth™ is in-
stalled on your PC (download: http://earth.google.de/download-
earth.html). There are two procedures to import bitmaps from
GoogleEarth™ into CadnaA:
1. The position of the CadnaA-objects or the bitmap-object is known
with respect to a geodetic coordinate system. In this case bitmaps can
be imported in correct position from GoogleEarth™.
2. The position of the CadnaA-objects is not geo-referenced (i.e. only
relative local coordinates are known). In this case bitmaps can be
imported by selecting the area in GoogleEarth™.
In case the object coordinates are in a known geodetic system proceed as Objects Coordinates
follows: are geo-referenced

• If the geodetic datum of the object coordinates is known open the dia-
log Coordinate System (Options menu).
• On the dialog Coordinate System select the corresponding system and
the reference point and click OK.
• Select the bitmap symbol from the toolbox and draw a frame at the
position where you would like to have the GoogleEarth™ bitmap
inserted.
• Click in the edit mode with the right mouse button on the border of the
bitmap.
• On the dialog Bitmap click the button „Import from GoogleEarth“.
• Activate on dialog Options for GoogleEarth™ the option "Use
Bitmap-Dimensions“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

312
9.2 Chapter 9 - Data Import
Importing Bitmap from GoogleEarth™

Option „Use Bitmap-Dimensions“ activated

• The option "Height of View" determines the resolution and also the file
size of the imported file. Change the height of view to 2000 m.
• Agree with the conditions of use of GoogleEarth™ by activating the
check-box and click OK.
GoogleEarth™ is started and the target area is centered on automatically
(„Get Image").
• Confirm the selection with OK.
• If the query dialog is not visible move the GoogleEarth™ window a
little aside.
• Subsequently, you are prompted to enter a file name for the bitmap.
• Click OK and the bitmap is displayed in the CadnaA-main window.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
Importing Bitmap from GoogleEarth™ 9.2 313

Bitmap as background image, imported from GoogleEarth™

Bitmap as ground texture in 3D-Special view

In the alternative case the bitmaps can be imported by selection in Objects Coordinates
GoogleEarth™. are not geo-refe-
renced
• If nessecary select the command New from the File menu.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

314
9.2 Chapter 9 - Data Import
Importing Bitmap from GoogleEarth™

• Select the bitmap symbol from the toolbox once more and draw a
bitmap frame.
• Click in input mode with the right mouse button on the border of the
bitmap (alternatively, double-click with the left mouse button in edit
mode).
• On the dialog Bitmap click the button „Import from GoogleEarth“.
• Activate the option "Select in Google Earth™ and modify the bitmap-
dimensions“ on dialog Options for GoogleEarth™.

* With the option „Position to current CadnaA View“ activated the

bitmap imported matches with the visible project part (i.e. screen
area) of the CadnaA-main window.

Option „Select in Google Earth™ and modify the bitmap-dimensions“ activated

• Agree with the conditions of use of GoogleEarth™ by activating the

check-box and click OK.
• On the subsequent dialog Coordinate System select the system to be
applied for the corner coordinates of the bitmap.
• For example, select the system „UTM coordinates (northern hemis-
phere)“ with the reference „WGS84“ and click OK.
• Now, CadnaA switches to GoogleEarth™ to enable the selection of the
screen section.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
Importing Bitmap from GoogleEarth™ 9.2 315

• Move to the location using the features offered by GoogleEarth™.

• When the location has been set return to CadnaA and confirm your
selection by clicking OK.

Confirming the selection

• Subsequently you will be prompted to save the file.

• On dialog Bitmap click OK.
In case the bitmap coordinates are outside the present limits, they will be
adjusted automatically. The imported bitmap is displayed in CadnaA with
the object coordinates according to the selected geodetic datum.

Bitmap as background image, imported from GoogleEarth™

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

316
9.2 Chapter 9 - Data Import
Importing Bitmap from GoogleEarth™

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
DXF-Import 9.3 317

9.3 DXF-Import
Data for object geometry provided in the DXF-format (DXF: "Data Ex-
change Format") can be used to set up a model in CadnaA. Due to the on-
going modification of the DXF-format by Autodesk, the manufacturer of
AutoCAD, a DXF-file may contain various objects (e.g. lines, polylines,
3D-objects etc.). Basically, a DXF file is a text file with ASCII-compatible
type range which can also be displayed in an ordinary text editor.
To ensure a smooth import to CadnaA the following rules should be Prerequisites
observed by the DXF-file:
• Different object types are on separate layers.
• All objects superfluous for the object representation (e.g. text frames,
fiducial marks, auxiliary lines etc.) are deleted from the drawing.
• Polygon objects (e.g. buildings) are stored as polylines.

* Polygon objects not been saved as polylines consist of a multitude of

individual lines which can afterwards - if necessary - be closed only
if you have the CadnaA-option XL (command „Close Buildings“).
• Open polygons (e.g. roads) have been saved as such.
• For roads, just the central axis is relevant since the road width is ente-
red in CadnaA as road parameter.
In the following example buildings and roads are imported from a DXF Example
file. This DXF file is available for download from:
http://download.datakustik.de/download/buildings_roads.zip

Proceed as follows:
• Unzip the file (e.g. using http://www.winzip.de)
• Select on the dialog File|Import the file type „DXF (AutoCad)".

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

318
9.3 Chapter 9 - Data Import
DXF-Import

• Click once (!) on the file name and then click on button „Options“ on
dialog Import File.
The dialog Options for DXF-Import is displayed. On the table, each
CadnaA object type can be assigned to a single layer in the DXF file. In
this example, roads and buildings are to be assigned.
• Double-click into the table row "Road".
• Select from the list box „Layer“ in the dialog Import:Layer the layer
name „ROAD“. Subsequently, all objects on this layer are assigned to
the object type „Road“.

Selecting the layer ROAD for all roads

• Double-click into the table row „Building“.

• Select from the list box „Layer“ in the dialog Import:Layer the layer
name „BUILD“". Subsequently, all objects on this layer are assigned to
the object type „Building“.

Selecting the layer BUILD for all buildings

• Activate the option „Use Object Height for Polylines“ on the bottom of
the dialog.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
DXF-Import 9.3 319

Option „Use Object Height for Polylines“ activated

• Close the dialog Options for DXF-Import with OK.

• Launch the import procedure by click on the button „Open“ on dialog
Import files.
• If you do not see any objects in CadnaA engage the display of the
entire limits (symbol: ) or click via menu Options|Limits the button
„Calc“.
• Press the key combination CTRL+3 to display the objects visible on
the screen in 3D-Special view.
Via the building’s table (menu Tables|Obstacles|Building) you may
check whether the building heights have been imported (column
„Height“). The road widths, however, have not been imported since the
geometry data refers to the roads axis only. The road width might be im-
ported via ODBC, e.g. from spreadsheet tables.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

320
9.3 Chapter 9 - Data Import
DXF-Import

Imported roads and buildings

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
SHP-Import 9.4 321

9.4 SHP-Import
With geometry and object data resulting from geographical information
systems (GIS), these can be imported using the flexible shape import filter
of CadnaA (from ArcGIS/ArcView/ArcInfo). A shape file consists of
three files:
• file extension *.shp: file containing object geometries,
• file extension *.shx: index file (containing a position index for geome-
try),
• file extension *.dbf: file containing the object’s attributes (table in the
dBASE III-format).
Since GIS-systems are structured by layers or topics specific objects can
be addressed to a single shape file.
In the following example buildings and their attributes are imported from a Example
shape file. This shape file is available for download from:
http://download.datakustik.de/download/buildings.zip
Proceed as follows:
• Unzip the file (e.g. with http://www.winzip.de)
• Select on the dialog File|Import file type "ArcView".
• Click once (!) on the file name buildings.shp and then click on but-
ton „Options“ on dialog Import File.
The dialog Options for ArcView Shapefile-Import is displayed. On the
table, each CadnaA object type can be assigned to a single layer in the
shape file. In this example, buildings are to be assigned.
• Click on the vertical scroll bar of the table on the left to display the
table entry „Building“.
• Click in line „Building“, into the column „Layer“, and enter a asterisk
symbol (*).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

322
9.4 Chapter 9 - Data Import
SHP-Import

* The asterisk symbol is a wild card for any text string. Consequently,
in this example, all objects will be imported as buildings.
• Note that the option „Unknown Attributes to Memo-Variables“ is acti-
vated. This ensures that all attributes imported from the DBF-file
which do not correspond with the building’s attributes in CadnaA will
be copied to the memo-window of the buildings.

Configuration for import of shape files

• Close the dialog Options for ArcView Shapefile-Import with OK.

• On dialog Import files click on button „Open“.
• Open the building’s table (via Tables menu, Obstacles|Buildings).
• Click into the first line in the table and then click the button „Sync.Gra-
phic“.
• CadnaA centers on this building in the main window.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
SHP-Import 9.4 323

• Double-click on the border of this building to open its edit dialog.

Edit dialog of the building Memo-Window of the building

The unknown attributes "INHAB" and "HEIGHT" were copied as string

variables into the Memo-Window since their designation does not corres-
pond with the CadnaA-object attributes. On the next step, these string va-
riables are transferred to the attributes EINW (=inhabitants) and HA
(=height) of the buildings.
* Alternatively, the same final result could be achieved after reimport Transform Attributes
with the following settings in the input box „Transform Attributes“:

To write the content of the string variable "INHAB" into attribute EINW Replace Attributes
of the buildings proceed as follows:
• Click with the right mouse button in the white screen area and select
Modify Objects from the context menu.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

324
9.4 Chapter 9 - Data Import
SHP-Import

• Select the action „Modify Attribute“ for the buildings as object type.
• On dialog Modify Attribute select the attribute to be changed, EINW,
and enter „Replace String, Replace with“:

{MEMO_INHAB}

Attribute EINW is replaced by the content

of the string variable INHAB

• Click OK and confirm the action by „All“.

• Double-click on a building’s border to check whether the inhabitants
were transferred into the input box „Residents“ of the building’s dia-
log.
Analogously, the building height is transferred to the attribute HA.
• Click with the right mouse button to the white screen area once again
and select Modify Attributes from the context menu.
• Select the action „Modify Attribute“ for the buildings as object type.
• On dialog Modify Attribute select the attribute to be changed, HA,
and enter „Replace String, Replace with“:

{MEMO_HEIGHT}

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
SHP-Import 9.4 325

Attribute HA is replaced by the content

of the string variable HEIGHT

• Click OK and confirm the action by „All“.

• Double-click on a building’s border to check whether the height has
transferred into the input box „First Point, Height“ of the building’s
dialog Geometry.
• Press the key combination CTRL+3 to display the objects visible on
the screen in 3D-Special view.
On the tables Building (Tables menu, Obstacles) it can be seen that the
height and the number of residents have been assigned.

Buildings with heights and residents imported

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

326
9.4 Chapter 9 - Data Import
SHP-Import

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
ODBC-Import 9.5 327

9.5 ODBC-Import
CadnaA enables to import data from various data sources via its ODBC
interface (Open Database Connectivity) into a project file (menu File|Da-
tabase).
In order to establish access using the database interface, an appropriate da-
taset is required from which the parameters are imported (e.g. MS-Excel
or MS-Access). Furthermore, a suitable ODBC-driver must be installed on
the PC. To check your system for available ODBC driver go to
Settings|Control Panel|Administrative Tools|Data Sources (ODBC)
from the Windows start menu.
Examples for the data import via ODBC:
1. sound level spectra, sound reduction spectra etc.
2. object attributes (name, emission data etc., text attributes for the
Memo-Window)
3. object coordinates of point objects (e.g. receiver points, point sour-
ces, bitmaps)
The following spectra of sound power levels shall be imported via ODBC Example 1:
from an MS-Excel-worksheet. Importing Sound
Power Level Spectra

Table with sound power level spectra, named range selected

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

328
9.5 Chapter 9 - Data Import
ODBC-Import

This file is available for download from:

http://download.datakustik.de/download/spectra.zip
The tables consist of the following columns:
- Name,
- ID,
- spectrum type:
type=2 means a PWL-spectrum, see attribute LW_TYP on the Win-
dows-help or in CadnaA-manual „Attributes, Variables and Key-
words“)
- weighting (here: A-weighted),
- octave band data from 31 to 8000 Hz.
The data range (including the column designation) to be imported is selec-
ted in the "Named Range" of MS-Excel by the name „data“. To this data
range access is provided on ODBC-import.
Proceed as follows to import the data into CadnaA:
• Open the dialog Database|Definition on the File menu.

• Select via the file selector symbol from the ODBC data sources
available on your PC the driver for MS-Excel-files (about tabs "File
Data Sources" or "Machine Data Sources").
• On the following dialog select the file spectra.xls and click OK.
• Scroll in the table „Object Type“ on dialog Database down to the bot-
tom and select the object type „Sound Levels“.
• Now, activate the option „Import Object Type“. The selected object
type is highlighted.
• Select the named range of cells from „Table“ (here: „data“).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
ODBC-Import 9.5 329

Configuring data import via ODBC

Now, the table columns are assigned to the corresponding object attributes
in CadnaA. To this end, each attribute for which data is to be imported the
corresponding table column name of the database table is assigned.
• Double-click into the first line "Bez" of the table „Assign Columns“.
• On dialog Assign Columns select the table column „Name“ to assign
its content to the attribute BEZ.

Assigning column „Name“ to the attribute BEZ

• Proceed with the attribute ID and assign this to the table column „ID“.
• The attribute BEWERT (i.e. weighting type) gets assigned the the table
column „Weight“.
• Furthermore, the attribute STYPI is assigned to coulmn „Type“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

330
9.5 Chapter 9 - Data Import
ODBC-Import

• Finally, assign the octave band data to the respective attributes. To faci-
liate the procedure you may use the arrow buttons to switch to the
next attribute:
- attribute SIN_31 to column „f_31“,
- attribute SIN_63 to column „f_63“ etc. till
- attribute SIN_8000 to column „f_8000“.

Assigning octave band level data

• So, the configuration of the ODBC interface is completed. Close the

dialog Database with OK.
• To start the import, select the command Database|Import from the
File menu.
• Activate on the subsequent dialog the option „Append non-existing
Objects“ and click OK.
Now, the data is imported. Alternatively, you may also update existing ob-
jects or select the combination of both options. The imported sound level
spectra can be displayed from the Tables menu, tables Libraries (lo-
cal)|Sound Levels..

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
ODBC-Import 9.5 331

Now, road data shall be imported for 9 roads via ODBC. The MS-Excel Example 2: Import of
file with the respective road data is available for download from: Road Data
http://download.datakustik.de/download/road_data.zip

The MS-Excel file has the following columns:

• Name: road’s name,
• ID: relevant characteristic for synchronisation,
• MDTD: mean daily traffic data,
• Type: type of road,
• speed_car: speed limit for cars (km/h),
• speed_truck: speed limit for trucks (km/h).
• rd_width: distance between the outer lane’s axis in m.
First, enter into a new CadnaA-file nine roads.
• Select the object „Road“ from the toolbox.
• Enter an arbitrary road network consisting of nine separate roads (i.e.
nine road objects).

Road network consisting of nine roads

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

332
9.5 Chapter 9 - Data Import
ODBC-Import

• Open the Road table from the Tables|Sources menu.

• Click with the right mouse button in the column "ID" and select} the
command „Change Column“.
• Enter in section „Replace Strings, Replace with“: rd_ #
• After OK all roads receive the ID "rd_" plus a single-digit number.
• Save the file under a new name.
• Open the dialog Database|Definition on the File menu.

• Select via the file selector symbol from the ODBC data sources
available on your PC the driver for MS-Excel-files.
• Select the file road_data.xls in the following dialog and click
OK.
• On dialog Database select the object type „Road“ from the table of
object types.
• Activate the option „Import Object Type“. The selected object type is
marked.
• Select the named range in the MS-Excel-file via „Table“ (here: „data).
• Assign the following attributes the respective table column as listed in
the following table per double-click:
Attribute Table Column
BEZ Name
ID ID
FBABST dist
DTV MDTD
STRGATT Type
VPKW sp_car
VLKW sp_truck

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 9 - Data Import
ODBC-Import 9.5 333

• Close the dialog Database with OK.

• Select the command Import on menu File|Database to import the
data.
• Activate on the subsequent dialog the option „Update existing Objects“
and click OK.
The data is imported and the road data is updated. The imported data can
be displayed via the menu Tables|Sources|Roads..

Table Road showing the imported road data

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

334
9.5 Chapter 9 - Data Import
ODBC-Import

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants 335

Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants

CadnaA offers efficient features to organize objects in such a way that a

file may contain several stages of a project - even with large project files.
This considerably simplifies the handling of different project situations
(e.g. actual state, planning case A, planning case B) as those situations do
not have to be stored in separate files requiring multiple files to be edited
when changes become necessary.
In CadnaA objects can be organized in groups. All objects of a group have
a common characteristic (being a part of the ID). Up to 16 variants are
possible in a CadnaA file making use of these predefined groups. The
group formation can be accomplished either manually or semiautomatical-
ly using the ObjectTree.
All possibilities are explained in this chapter using examples.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

336 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants 337

10.1 Structuring Data by Defining Groups

A group is a selection of objects which is based on a predefined expression
based on the ID. For these groups of objects different actions can be car-
ried out, for example:
• deletion,
• conversion into a different object (e.g. converting a line source into a
road or a railway),
• transformation of object coordinates,
• activating or deactivating objects for calculation,
• representation of results etc.
The groups are defined via menu Tables|Group.

Table Groups with two groups (Tables menu)

Objects are associated with a group by specifying a character string („Ex-

pression“) being part of the object’s ID. In the above example all objects
whose ID starts with the letter A are belong to the group „actual“ (i.e. actu-
al situation). All objects, however, whose ID starts with the letter P are be-
long to the group „planning“ (i.e. planning case). The asterisk (*) is a wild
card substituting all further characters of a string.
When groups are defined, actions can be restricted to all objects of an exis- Group dependent
ting group. On the dialog Modify Objects, a list box is available listing all Actions
groups in the present project.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

338 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants

By the action in the following figure all roads of the group „present“
would be deleted.

Deleting all roads of group „present“

In principle, actions available on the dialog Modify Objects can either be

applied to all objects or be restricted to the objects within an existing
group.
Example With sources organized in groups, their respective partial levels are dis-
played on the group table. For example:
• Enter two groups of 10 point sources each.
• Draw a section around the left group of point sources.

A section delimiting the 10 point sources on the left

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants 339

• Click with the right mouse button on the section’s border and select the
command Modify Objects from the context menu.
• Select the action „Modify Attribute“, as range“ „Inside Polygon“, and
as object type the point source. Now, click OK.

Modifying an attribute of the point sources inside the section

• On dialog Modify Attribute, select from the list box „Attribute“ the
item „ID“ and enter for „Replace Strings, Replace with“ the following
string: compressor_##.

Replace Strings: Modifying attribute ID

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

340 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants

• Click OK and confirm the action with „All“.

In the next step, a different ID will be assigned to the sources outside the
section.
• Again, click on the section’s border with the right mouse button and
select the command Modify Objects from the context menu.
• The action and the object type selected are retained. Deactivate the
range „Inside Polygon“ and activate the range „Outside Polygon“.
• Click the OK-button.

Modifying an attribute of the point sources outside the section

• On list box „Attribute“ the „ID“ is still selected.

• Change the input for „Replace with“ to: ventilator_##.
• Click OK and confirm by „All“.
The sources inside the section have an ID starting with „compressor...“
while the sources’ ID outside starts with „ventilator...“. In either case the
ID is followed by an underscore and a counting number.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants 341

Now, an emission level is assigned to all sources. To simplify, all sources

receive an A-weighted sound power level of 100 dB(A).
• Click into the white area of the CadnaA main window and select the
command Modify Objects.
• The selected action („Modify Attribute“) and object type („point
source“) can be kept.
• Click OK and select from the list box the attribute "Lw_Li" which rep-
resents the numerical emission value PWL.
• Enter on „Replace Strings, Replace with“ the value: 100.

Emission: sound power level of 100 dB(A)

• Click OK and confirm by „All“.

As can be seen from the table for point sources (menu Tables|Sour-
ces|Point Source) all point sources have received an emission level PWL
of 100 dB(A). In the next step, three receiver points are entered and two
groups are defined.
• Select the receiver point from the toolbox and enter three receiver
points.
• Address a name to the receiver via the respective table (menu Tab-
les|Receiver). Click into each table cell in column „Name“ and type
RCVR1 to RCVR 3. You can immediately write to the table cell. Click
the „Close“-button.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

342 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants

• Click into the white area on the screen and select the action „Generate
Label“ for the receivers and click OK.
• Select the attribute „Name“ and click OK.
• Confirm the action with „All“.
Now, all receiver points are labeled by their name.
• Open the Group table on the menu Tables.
• Click with the right mouse into the group table and select command
„Insert after“ from the context menu.
• Repeat the procedure to attach a second row.
• Type into the first line as a name „compressors“ and as expression
„c*“. Thus, all objects starting by the letter C will belong to the first
group.
• Type into the first line as a name „ventilator“ and as expression „v*“.
Thus, all objects starting by the letter v will belong to the second
group.

Group table with two groups edited

• Close the table Groups and start the calculation by clicking the pocket
calculator-symbol on the symbol bar.
• Now, reopen the group table.

Partial Level day per group for three receivers

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants 343

On the table Groups the partial levels of each group for the selected per-
formance parameter (Day) at all three receiver points are displayed.
• Double-click into the first line of „compressors“.
• On the dialog Group click the button „Partial Level“.
The subsequent dialog lists the A-weighted partial levels at all receiver
points by all sources within this groupand for all performance parameters
(on this example: for Day and Night).

Partial Level list for group „compressors“

Via the context menu command Sort (right mouse button) those values
can be sorted for the column selected, e.g in a descending order.

* For further information on group definition please refer to chapter

14.2.1 Defining Groups in the CadnaA-reference manual.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

344 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
ObjectTree 10.2 345

10.2 ObjectTree
The ObjectTree (menu Tables|ObjectTree) enables to assign objects in a
project to a hierarchical group structure. By this feature, CadnaA offers a
feature for a semi-automatic definition of groups and the allocation of ob-
jects to these groups.
The sequence of actions required consists of the following steps:
1. definition of the ObjectTree-structure,
2. allocation of the objects to the ObjectTree-groups,
3. evaluation of partial sound power levels and partial receiver levels.
At first an example file is created with point sources into two groups. Entering Objects
Proceed as follows:
• Enter a point source using the mouse having an A-weighted sound
power level of 100 dB(A).
• Select the command Duplicate from the context menu of the point
source (right mouse button).
• Enter 5 copies in horizontal and -5 in vertical direction.

Duplicating the point source

* Due to the input of a negative value -5 the duplicates will be genera-

ted in negative x-direction.
• Enter 10 meters for horizontal and vertical gaps and click OK.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

346
10.2 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
ObjectTree

Subsequently, the 25 point sources with the same emission are generated
and displayed on the screen. Now, this group of objects shall be copied to a
distance of 100 m to the right.
• Draw a closed polygon object around this group of 25 point sources.
Use e.g. the calculation area for this.
• Finalize the input of the polygon by clicking the right mouse button.

• Change you to edit mode (symbol: ).

25 point sources being enclosed by a calculation area

• Click with the right mouse button onto the polygon of the calculation
area and select the context menu command Modify Objects.
• Select the action „Transformation“, the range „Inside Polygon“, and
the „Point Source“ as object type.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
ObjectTree 10.2 347

Duplicating the point sources using action „Transformation“

• Click OK and enter on the subsequent dialog Transform Coordinates

- with the option „Rotation + Translation“ selected - into the frist input
box for „Translation“ a value of 100. This will cause that all objects
concerned will be shifted by ∆x=100 m to the right.

Translation transformation of the duplicates by 100 m to the right

• IMPORTANT: Activate the option „Keep Original“ on the bottom of

the dialog and click OK.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

348
10.2 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
ObjectTree

• Confirm the action by „All“.

Transformation: group of point source being duplicated

Defining a Structure In the next step, two groups are defined within the ObjectTree.
for ObjectTree
• Open the dialog ObjectTree from the menu Tables|ObjectTree|Defi-
nition.
• Set by a single click the focus to the "Root" and click twice onto the
file icon on the dialog’s symbol bar. Two group symbols will be
inserted into the root, named "(untitled)".
• Rename the groups by double-click into „group 1“ and „group 2“.

ObjectTree with two groups

Now, objects can be assigned to those two groups.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
ObjectTree 10.2 349

In order to assign objects to the ObjectTree each edit window has the Ob- Assigning Objects
jectTree icon to the right of the ID input box. When a group symbol on the individually
dialog ObjectTree is selected and the dialog closed by OK, a correspon-
ding group specification is added to the ID automatically.
• Double-click on a point source within the left group.

• Click on the symbol to the right of the ID input box.

• Click on "Root" and select by a double-click „group 1“.
• Click OK on dialog Modify Attribute and confirm by „All“
Subsequently, an automatically generated identifier is written in front of
the ID.
• Close the dialog Point Source.
• Open the dialog ObjectTree on the menu Tables|ObjectTree|Defini-
tion once again.
• Click on the + symbols in front of „Root“ and then in front of „group 1.
The point source is listed within the object group 1.
To speed up the assignment of objects to ObjectTree-groups a further pro- Assigning Objects
cedure of automated assignment is available. automatically

• Click with the right mouse button on the border of the calculation area
delimiting the sources on the left and select the command Modify
Objects from the context menu.
• Select the action Modify Attributes, the range „inside Polygon“ for
„Point Source“ as object type and click OK.
• On dialog Modify Attribute select the attribute „ID“ and activate the
option „Replace Strings“.

• The ObjectTree is accessible via the symbol . Click on this symbol.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

350
10.2 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
ObjectTree

Dialog Modify Attribute, enabling access to the ObjectTree

• Open the Root directory and double-click on „group 1“.

• Confirm the action on dialog Modify Attribute by clicking OK.
• In the dialog Modify Objects click on „All“.
• Open the ObjectTree via menu Tables|ObjectTree|Definition to check
for the result.
• Click on the + symbols in front of „Root“ and then in front of „group
1“.
All 25 point sources have been assigned to group 1. Now, the remaining
point sources will be assigned to group 2.
•Click with the right mouse button on the border of the calculation area
enclosing the point source to the left and select again the command
Modify Objects from the context menu.
• Select the action Modify Attributes, and this time the range „outside
Polygon“ for „Point Source“ as object type. Click OK.
• On dialog Modify Attribute select the attribute „ID“, activate the
option „Replace Strings“, and click on the symbol to access the
ObjectTree once more.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
ObjectTree 10.2 351

• Assign the objects this time to group 2 by a double-click.

• Return to the main window by clicking OK and „All“.
• Open the dialog ObjectTree via the menu Tables|ObjectTree|Defini-
tion.
• By click on the respective + symbol all objects within the groups 1 and
2 are displayed. So far, the point sources do not have any name.
• Close the dialog ObjectTree and select from the Tables menu the sub- Naming of the
group Sources|Point Source. Point Sources
• Click with right mouse button in column „Name“ and select the com-
mand Change Column.
• On the dialog Change Column select the option „Replace Strings“ and
enter in input box „Replace with“ the string „PS ##“.

Assigning names to the point sources

• After clicking OK and confirming with „All“ the poitn sources are
named and numbered consecutively.
• Close the table Point Source by clicking the button „Close“.
• From the dialog ObjectTree|Definition you can see that the point
sources are listed with their respective names now.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

352
10.2 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
ObjectTree

Sound Power Level The table of sound power levels displays all partial sound power levels of
Table the sources, and the energetic sum of each group, and the overall sound
power level of all sources in the ObjectTree for the presently selected per-
formance parameter.
• Open table of sound power levels via menu Tables|ObjectTree|Sound
Power Level.

Table Sound Power Level on menu Tables|ObjectTree

In column „Name“, the groups and the objects within each group are in-
dented versus the root directory. In column „A“, the A-weighted sound po-
wer levels of the sources, of the groups, and the overall sound power level
is displayed. Since - in this example - the emission of the sources has been
specified based on A-weighted sound power levels the columns of the oc-
taves and column "lin" remain empty.
Partial Level Table • On the toolbox, select the receiver point and enter three receiver points.
• Name the receivers on table column „Name“ by R1 to R3 (menu Tab-
les|Receiver). Write directly into the table cell and close the table.
• Click into the white area of the screen and select the command Modify
Objects.
• Select the action „Generate Label“ for the receiver and click OK.
• Select the attribute „Name“, click OK and confirm with „All“.
All receiver points are labeled by their name now.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
ObjectTree 10.2 353

Three receivers labeled by their name

• Run the calculation by clicking the pocket calculator-symbol on the

symbol bar.
• Now, open the table Partial Level on menu Tables|ObjectTree.
The partial level table lists the partial levels by all sources in the Ob-
jectTree for the presently selected performance parameter per receiver
point using the specified group structure. In column „Name“, the groups
and the objects within each group are indented versus the root directory. In
each column, either the A-weighted overall level, or the A-weighted group
level, or the A-weighted partial level of the each source are displayed.

Table Partial Level on menu Tables|ObjectTree

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

354
10.2 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
ObjectTree

By a double-click in a line of the table Partial Level the corresponding

source dialog is opened.

* Whether the columns for the octave band levels are displayed or not
is controlled by a corresponding entry in the file CADNAA.INI. Per
default, the file CADNAA.INI is located in the WINDOWS-direc-
tory on your disk drive C:/. If required open this file and add to the
section [Main] the following line:

ObjTreePartLevSpekImmAnz = 0

This variable controls the maximum number of receiver points whose

octave band levels are displayed on the table Partial Level of the
ObjectTree. With the above setting (zero) no octave band levels will
be displayed.

Table ObjectTree|Partial Level, octave band levels suppresseed

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
Managing Projects using Variants 10.3 355

10.3 Managing Projects using Variants

By using variants it can be toggled between different project situations
based on the prevailing group structure. The group definitions applied may
originate from user-defined definitions (via menu Tables|Group) or from
definitions within the ObjectTree (via menu Tables|ObjectTree).
The procedure is explained using a road without and with a parallel barrier.
• Enter a road with a MDTD of 20000 vehicles/day (Federal Road) with Editing a Road and a
a road width of 3 m. Barrier
• Click with the right mouse button on the road’s axis and select the
command Parallel Object.
• Select as object type „Barrier“, enter one distance of 5 m and a height
difference of 8 m.

Generating a parallel barrier

• Double-click on the barrier and enter for the ID: bar_1

• Open the dialog Variant on the Tables menu.
Just the variant V01 is activated per default („Use Variant“). In this ex-
ample, two variants „without barrier“ and „with barrier“ shall be used. At
first, the variant V02 has to activated.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

356
10.3 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
Managing Projects using Variants

• In the table on the right, click once on variant „V02“.

• Now, activate the option „Use Variant“.

Variant V02 active for usage

• For variant V02, enter the short name „w bar“ and the name „with bar-
rier“.
• Switch to variant V01 by click on it in the left column.
• For variant V02, enter the short name „w/o bar“ and the name „without
barrier“.
• Close the dialog Variants.
Thus, variant V01 is defined not considering the barrier, while variant V02
is considering the barrier. The list box for variants on the CadnaA-main
window lists - instead of „V01“ and „V02“ - the options „w/o bar“ and „w
bar“.

List box for switching of variants

Now, a group and its activation status must be defined with respect to the
two variants. This occurs on the dialog Groups (menu Tables|Group).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
Managing Projects using Variants 10.3 357

• Open the dialog Groups on the Tables menu.

• Click with the right mouse button into the table and select the com-
mand Insert after.
• In table Groups, enter in column „Expression“ the following string
using the keyboard: bar*
• Move to column „w/o bar“ using the mouse (single click) or the arrow
keys and enter a minus sign (-).
• Move to column „w bar“ and enter a plus sign (+).
The minus sign means that all objects which correspond to the ID-expres-
sion „bar*“ are deactivated in variant „without barrier“ while all objects
which correspond to that expression are, however, activated in variant
„with barrier“.

A group assigned to two variants

• Close the table Groups by OK.

With the variant V01 („without barrier“) selected it can be seen from the
CadnaA-main window that the barrier is deactivated: The barrier is dis-
played as a gray hatched line.
• Select from the list box for variants the variant „w bar“ (with barrier).
The active barrier (i.e. providing a screening effect) is diplayed as a full
line on the graphics.
• Toggle between both variants.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

358
10.3 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
Managing Projects using Variants

Variant V01 „without barrier“ Variant V02 „with barrier“

(barrier deactivated) (barrier activated)

Entering a Receiver Now, enter a receiver point isprior to calculation.

Point
• Select the object „Receiver“ from the toolbox and place it to the left
side of the road where it is screened by the barrier.
• Select from the receiver’s context menu the the command Generate
Label and select from the subsequent dialog the attribute LP1 (evalua-
tion parameter 1 on dialog Configuration|Eval. Parameter).

Display the evaluation parameter 1 (LP1) in a label

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
Managing Projects using Variants 10.3 359

There are two possibilities to perform the calculation: Calculation of

Variants
1. Calculation of each variant separately: To this end, select the respec-
tive variant and click the pocket calculator symbol on the tool bar.
2. Calculation of all variants: Select from the Calculation menu the
command Calc and mark „All Variants“ on the dialog.
• Select the command Calc on the Calculation menu.
• Activate the option „All Variants“ and click OK.

Calculate all variants

• Now, toggle between both variants.

The calculated level for the selected variant is displayed in the label close
to the receiver point.

Receiving level for variant V01 Receiving level for variant V02
„without barrier“ „with barrier“

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

360
10.3 Chapter 10 - Groups & Variants
Managing Projects using Variants

Alternatively, the barrier could have been deactivated by unchecking the

mark ( ) in front of the ID on the barrier’s edit dialog. The possibility of
toggling variants using groups is, however, much quicker and is by all
means more comfortable in cases where a numerous objects are to be acti-
vated and deactivated.

* Please consider that the grid calculation - unlike the calculation at

receiver points - is performed for the active variant only. As CadnaA
offers up to 16 variants with up to 4 performance parameters each, no
sufficient RAM memory is available to store up to 64 grids having
larger limits.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects 361

Chapter 11 - Modify Objects

The command Modify Objects enables to address various actions to a sin-

gle or several object groups. The command is selectable from the global
context menu when clicking into the white area of the CadnaA-main win-
dow.
The command is also available from the context menu of an individual ob-
ject. When being selected from the context menu of a closed polygon the
command refers to all objects inside, outside, or on the polygon border.
The actions may be applied to an individual objects as well upon a
selection of a respective action from the object’s context menu.

Dialog Modify Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

362 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects

Actions The following actions can also be performed for several objects or groups
of objects:
• Delete
• Modify Attribute
• Duplicate
• Force Rectangle
• Force Right Angles - Orthogonalize
• Snap Point to Facade
• Modify Order of Points
• Spline
• Simplify Geo
• Break into Pieces
• Connect Lines
• Transformation
• Convert to
• Generate Rails
• Generate Station
• Generate Building Evaluation
• Generate Label
• Generate Floors
• Parallel Object
• Activation
• Swap Name / ID
• Delete Duplicates
• Fit DTM to Object
• Fit Object to DTM

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects 363

If you want to cover all objects in your project file with this function you Modifying all
must execute the command Modify Objects from the context menu by cli- Objects 10.3.0
cking with a right mouse button onto a free space in your plan. When se-
lecting this command from the context menu of an object this object will
be excluded from the subsequent action.
Alternatively, the selection can be restricted to all objects of a group (see Modifying all objects
chapter 10.1). Select the name of the pertinent group from the list box. All of a group 10.3.0
actions will be restricted to the objects of the specified group.

If you do not want all objects to be affected by the action selected provisi- Modifying several
onally draw a closed polygon around the object to be or not to be modified objects 10.3.0
in common (e.g. a calculation area).
Another alternative is to use an existing polygon, e. g. a building, that is
not to be modified. Click the closed polygon under the Edit Mode using
the RIGHT mouse button, then select the Modify Objects command on the
context menu.
On the dialog, a list of Actions available for selection. Choose the action Objects inside, out-
you want to apply to the objects defined. By activating the pertinent check side,
boxes, you specify the position of the object types to be modified, i. e. in- on the border line of
side, outside, or on the borderline of the auxiliary polygon. All these opti- a polygon 10.3.0
ons can apply simultaneously.

* If objects are placed on the borderline of the polygon or if they are

inside or outside the polygon you may enforce the functions Break
Lines (see chapter 12.5) or Break Areas (see chapter 12.6) from the
polygon context menu to break the lines or areas on the intersection
of the borderline if desired before you excute the Modify
Objects|Action command.
Moreever, you can choose whether the action is only to apply to activated Activated or deacti-
or deactivated objects. If the option indifferent is checked, it does not vated objects 10.3.0
matter whether an object is activated or not.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

364 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects

Condition 10.3.0 In addition, a condition can be specified for numerical expressions to

restrict the selection of objects. For the specification of a condition all at-
tributes of the object type selected are available. From the pop-up menu
list an attribute for the highlighted object type can be selected. This allows
you to define even complex conditional expressions (see chapter 6.2 in the
CadnaA-manual „Attributes Variables, and Keywords“). The operation
will be executed only if the condition is fulfilled (expression <> 0).
These three types of restrictions (range/activation/condition) can be ap-
plied separately or in combination of each other.
Choose Object Now select the object types to which the specified action is to apply (Mul-
type 10.3.0 tiple Selection see chapter 3.5).
If you wish to cover all object types, click the All button.
When the dialog box is closed via the OK button, another dialog may ap-
pear depending on the action chosen. Enter the appropriate parameters the-
re. As soon as you have confirmed by clicking OK, the selected action is
applied to the objects as defined. It is possible to cancel the action in pro-
cess.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects 365

Example: Deleting
a group of
objects 10.3.0

The industrial enterprise in the above example, consisting of one building,  Industry.cna
point and line sources, is deleted using the context menu command Mo-
dify Objects.
• Draw a closed auxiliary polygon around the industrial enterprise.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

366 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects

• Select the auxiliary polygon using the RIGHT mouse button.

• From the context menu, select Modify Objects - the following dialog
appears:

• On the Actions list box, select Delete.

• Activate the checked boxes Inside Polygon and On Polygon Border-
line and
• choose the object type Point Source, Line Source, Building and
Aux.Polygon by clicking while pressing the Ctrl key (in this example
you may also choose all objects by clicking the All button)
• confirm by OK
In the dialog appearing next, you can either confirm or cancel the selected
action.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects 367

• Click the All button again and see how fast an industrial area can turn
into a residential area!
In this example, the trade enterprise inside the polygon has been deleted.
If the All button is clicked, a selected action will be applied to all objects
without the need for further confirmation, whereas the Yes button requires
explicit confirmation for each object.

The object on which the Action command is executed is excluded from

this action - in this example is it the auxiliary polygon. If desired delete
this object separately with the DEL key.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

368 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects 369

11.1 Delete
CadnaA-objects may be deleted in various ways:

• on the graphics:
- mark/activate the object
- press DEL/ENTF-keys or select from the object’s context menu the
command Delete
- CadnaA jumps automatically to the next object of that object group
• in the tables:
- mark the object’s line in the respective object’s table (Tables menu)
- press the DEL-key or select from the table’s context menu the com-
mand Delete
- CadnaA jumps automatically to the next object in that object table
• via the dialog Modify Objects:
- click into the white area on screen with the right mouse button
- select action „Delete“
- specify/select object type/s
- confirm the commands execution (Yes/No/All/Cancel)

* In special, the Delete-action on dialog Modify Objects is suitable for

deletion of many and/or different object types, being distributed
across the area.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

370 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Modify Attribute 11.2 371

11.2 Modify Attribute

With the command from the context menu Modify Objects|Action:Mo-
dify Attribute you can change the object’s attributes of different and/or
groups of objects globally.
For example, to increase the heights of existant objects by 5 m choose this
command and specify the parameter as displayed in the following figure.
Select those object typeswhose attributes you wish to modify. Depending
on the object type selected the corresponding attributes are available from
the subsequent dialog after clicking OK.

With these settings the object height (HA) is

increased for each object by 5 m.

For example, you have imported roads whose base-points (polygon points) Example:
have absolute heights. In this case the option absolute Height at every change height
Point is activated in CadnaA’s Geometry dialog. from absolute to
relative and vice
But you want relative heights for every base point to be able to adjust the
versa 11.2
roads new to your digital terrain model (DTM) in your project.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

372
11.2 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Modify Attribute

The following steps are necessary:

• Click with the Right mouse key on a free place in your file and choose
the function Modify Objects in the context menu.
• In the following dialog choose the action Modify Attribute, mark the
object Road and confirm with OK.
• In the dialog Modify Attribute choose the attribute HA (for the height
of the first point), activate the option Arithmetic and enter the value 0
(zero). You may enter an arbitrary value - CadnaA adjusts the heights
to the ground model anyway because the heights are relative after the
action.
• If you confirm all dialogs, the relative heights are then 0 m and the
option Interpolate from first/last point is activated (that means rela-
tive for a line-like object).
CadnaA shows the new heights, which are adapted then from the
ground model after calculation.
Now, if you want define the new heights as absolute, again repeat the abo-
ve described action but this time choose the attribute HA_ATT (attribute
for the height of the first point). Activate the option Replace String|Re-
place with and enter a blank. Confirm all dialogs. The heights are now de-
fined as absolute and the option absolute height at every point is
activated again. They are not changed again in case of a new calculation.
For point-like objects (e.g. point sources, receiver points etc., you can
change the attribute of the height with r for relative and a for absolute in-
stead with a blank.

Change Ground The elevation of point like objects like point source, receiver etc. can be
height changed or adapted also globally with their pertinent attribute with the
with Attribute 11.2 command Modify Objects | Action: Change Attribute.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Modify Attribute 11.2 373

Attribute:
• GROUND value of the ground height (m)
• GROUND_ATT attribute type of ground height:
I = enter value (m)
H = transfer height value of the building
any other character = calculate from DTM

Examples:
Replace String: Attribute:
Ground_Att
Find What: *
replace with: i
switches to ground attribute option to "Input of Value (m)"
Replace String: Attribute: Ground
Find What: *
replace with: 10
causes the ground height to be changed to 10 m.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

374
11.2 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Modify Attribute

Example: With the command/action Modify Objects|Modify Attribute you can

Change Color 11.2 also change the colors of auxiliary polygons. Deactivate the object types
being polygons the color of which shall not be changed. Proceed as fol-
lows:
• Choose Modify Objects|Modify Attribute, for only active objects,
type „Aux. Polygon“ and confirm with OK.

• In the next dialog Modify Attribute select the Attribute L_COLOR

for the line color from the list. In case you like to change the filling of a
closed polygon choose F_COLOR.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Modify Attribute 11.2 375

• Activate Arithmetic and enter RGB(255,0,0) in the box „New Value“.

* RGB embodies RED - YELLOW - BLUE, the numbers in brackets

are the corresponding values for the color red, yellow and blue. In
this example the polygons’ color change to red.
If your Aux. Polygons not change their colors then could that be that the
option use global properties is still active. Then you have to change this
as follows:
• In the dialog Modify Attribute select the attribute GLOBAL, activate
the option Replace String and enter a space in that field.
• After confirming with OK the polygons display their corresponding
color.
See also:
Attribute Abreviation (see Chapter 2.2 in the CadnaA-manual „Attributes,
Variables, and Keywords“)
Arithmetics and String-Replacement (see Chapter 11.2.5 in the CadnaA-
manual „Attributes, Variables, and Keywords“)
Context menu (see Chapter 12 - Context Menu)

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

376
11.2 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Modify Attribute

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Duplicating Objects 11.3 377

11.3 Duplicating Objects

This command can be executed from the context menu of an object or via
the context menu Modify objects, action „Duplicate“. In the second case
you can enter additional settings. It is applicable to all graphical objects.

To insert several objects of identical properties and the same size in Duplicate 11.3.0
horizontal and/or vertical rows in the CadnaA main window, you first in-
sert one object of the desired size and then select it by clicking it with the
right mouse button - the context menu opens.
Before an object is duplicated, it should be allocated the desired parame-
ters by editing. These parameters will be adopted for all duplicates.
From the context menu, select the Duplicate command. In the dialog that
opens, specify the number of duplicates and the distances between either
the borders or the center’s of the objects.

Click onto an object with the right mouse button and select
from the context menu the command Duplicate.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

378
11.3 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Duplicating Objects

Specify the number of copies (horizontal/vertical). With values being ne-

gative the duplicates will be generate in negative direction of the coordina-
te system.
Below, it is defined what the distances refer to - enter the distances in me-
ters. With point objects this is superfluous.

Result when applying the above operation (original is marked)

Horizontal: positive figure places the duplicates to the right of the exis-
ting object, a negative figure to the left of it.
Vertical: positive figure places the duplicates above the existing object, a
negative figure below.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Duplicating Objects 11.3 379

With the command sequence Modify Objects|Action: Duplicate you can Action Dupli-
enter additional settings: cate 11.3.0
The center point of objects being selected can be moved. Upon activation Move
Center
Point11.3.0
of the check box enter values accordingly.
Duplicated objects can be enlarged or minimized in horizontal and vertical Scaling Factor 11.3.0
direction. Upon activation of the check box enter values accordingly.
Duplicated objects can be rotated around their center point. Upon activati- Rotation around
on of the check box enter values accordingly. Center Point 11.3.0

See also chapter 4.3.6 Copying Objects and chapter 7.3.4 Coordinate
Transformation, paragraph Duplication by Transformation, Seite 14.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

380
11.3 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Duplicating Objects

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Force Rectangle 11.4 381

11.4 Force Rectangle

This command can be applied to any closed polygon with four corners.
Using this context menu command allows you to transform an arbitrary
quadrangle into a rectangle.
To this end, click the object with the right mouse button, and, from the
context menu, select the Force Rectangle command.

A quadrangle entered in CadnaA The same quadrangle after applying the

command "Force Rectangle"

See also chapter Chapter 12 - Context Menu, chapter Chapter 11 - Mo-

dify Objects and chapter 4.2.1 Inserting Objects Using the Mouse

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

382
11.4 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Force Rectangle

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Force Right Angles 11.5 383

11.5 Force Right Angles

This command can be applied to any closed polygon.
An arbitrary polygon with different angles between two adjacent polygon
points can be transformed into a polygon with right angles by specifying a
snap angle.

After executing „Force Right Angles“

Original polygon with snap angle 20° with snap angle 45°

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

384
11.5 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Force Right Angles

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Object Snap 11.6 385

11.6 Object Snap

The action „Object Snap“ on the dialog Modify Objects or via the context
menu enables a subsequent shift of objects (e.g. receivers, point/line or
vertical area sources) attached to building’s facades.
This feature is useful e.g.
• after having inserted objects without prior activation of the object snap
feature or
• after import of data.

Dialog Snap Point to Facade

On the dialog, the snap radius and the distance to the building’s facade are
to be specified. Objects resp. the polygon points of objects within the spe-
cified snap radius will be fixed at the specified distance from the facade.

see also:
chapter 3.3.3 Snap Point to Building Facade in the CadnaA-reference ma-
nual

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

386
11.6 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Object Snap

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Modify Order of Points 11.7 387

11.7 Modify Order of Points

The action „Modify Order of Points“ on dialog Modify Objects (also
available from the context menu of polylines) enables to subsequently
change the sequence of polygon points.

The option „Reverse Order of Points“ inverts the sequence of points in the Reverse Order of
polygon’s point list (dialog Geometry). Thus, the former first point beco- Points
mes the new last point.
The option „Point with max. Weight becomes Point 1“ enables to specify a Weighting Citerion
criterion defining the new first point. Via the double-arrow ( ) the
following pre-defined parameters can be selected:

Parameter Remarks

x, y, z object’s coordinates x, y, z

ground ground height

num number of the polygon point (counting from the

first point)

len 2D-polygon length

len3 3D-polygon length (considering the height z)

dist 2D-distance to the first point

dist3 3D-distance to the first point (considering the

height z)

The weighting criterion will by default select the highest value of the spe-
cified parameter/s („maximum weight“). In order to select for the smallest
value („minimum weight“) use the negation (e.g. „-ground“).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

388
11.7 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Modify Order of Points

Example 1 11.7.0 Task: The building’s polygon point having the highest ground height
become the new first polygon point of the buildings.
Background: When modeling buildings with terrain CadnaA defines
from the first polygon point the final height of the building. So, the relative
height will be attributed to the first polygon point. The subsequent polygon
points the heights are defined automatically assuming the building’s edge
is horizontal.
Solution: When importing building polygons the first polygon point is of-
ten defined randomly. In the picture below both buildings have a relative
height of 10 m. The representation (and also the calculation result) in Cad-
naA of the buildings height’s is, however, different as the first polygon
point of the building to the left is on the hill’s side, while for the right it is
on the valley’s side.

Hill with two buildings, both having a relative height of 10 m

To modify the order of points proceed as follows:

• Click onto the white area and select Modify Objects from the context
menu.
• Select the action „Modify Order of Points“ and the building for object
type.
• Click OK.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Modify Order of Points 11.7 389

• Activate on dialog Modify Order of Points the option „Point with

max. Weight becomes Point 1“ and enter the parameter ground or
select it from the list provided .

Point with maximum value “ground“ becomes new point 1

• Upon OK the command is executed.

Double-click onto the - in this example - building to the right and display
the list polygon points. The first polygon point is now located on the hill’s
side as there the highest ground height occurs.

Hill with two buildings, either with 1st polygon point on the hill’s side

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

390
11.7 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Modify Order of Points

Example 2 11.7.0 Task: The building point with the smallest ground height shall become the
first polygon point.
Solution: The start-off situation is equivalent to example 1. So, first pro-
ceed in the same way.
• Select from dialog Modify Order of Points again the option „Point
with max. Weight becomes Point 1“.
• Enter the parameter -ground or select it from the list provided in
edit a minus-sign in front.

Point with minimum value “ground“ becomes new point 1

• Upon OK the command is executed.

Double-click onto the building to the left and display the list polygon
points. The first polygon point is now located on the valley’s side as there
the lowest ground height occurs.

Hill with two buildings, either with 1st polygon point on the valley’s side

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Spline 11.8 391

11.8 Spline
This command directly from the context menu (see Chapter 12 - Context
Menu) or via Modify Object (see "Chapter 11 - Modify Objects") can be
applied to any open or closed polygon.
A selected polygon line is replaced by the smoothed curve using a cubic
polynom. This may change the polygons shape significantly.

Before applying the After applying the

Spline command Spline command

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

392
11.8 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Spline

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Simplify Geometry 11.9 393

11.9 Simplify Geometry

You can simplify any geometrical object for calculation purposes by redu-
cing the degree to which its details are taken into account. This can signifi-
cantly reduce calculation times - particularly for large projects. Any object
point lying at more than the specified distance from the straight line con-
necting the two adjacent points on that object, will be deleted and neglec-
ted in the calculation.

Click the object using the right mouse button and, from the context menu,
either select the Simplify Geometry command or Modify Object|Action:
Simplify Geometry. You also have the possibility for the pertinent file
format to simplify during import.

In the dialog that opens, enter, e.g., 10 m for the above road section. This
means that all points meeting the criterion will be deleted.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

394
11.9 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Simplify Geometry

Upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, polygon points are removed from
the road section.

If, also the option „Vertical (m)“ is activated, both conditions - horizontal
and vertical - have to be true to simplify the geometry.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Break into pieces 11.10 395

11.10 Break into pieces

By the action „Break into Pieces“ on the dialog Modify Objects or on the
context menu of a line-like object (e.g. road, line source) in the context
menu an object can be subdivided into several objects of the same kind.
This command can - for example - be applied to barriers along a road in
order to subdivide the entire barrier into sections of a defined length.

Via the dialog Break into Pieces you can either

• define the requested length of the new sections - the final section will
then be of a different length - or
• the number of new sections, which will then all have the same length or
• you break the line-shaped object on its polygon points.
The following example illustrates the effect when being applied to a road
defined from two polygon points.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

396
11.10 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Break into pieces

After having applied the command Break Lines to the road the road table
(Tables menu/Sources/Road) lists a separate line for each new road seg-
ment - in this example 13 roads in 13 lines.
This command is also useful in conjunction with the CadnaA-feature Op-
timize Walls (see Chapter 7.5 "Wall Optimization").

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Connect Lines 11.11 397

11.11 Connect Lines

In CadnaA, you can connect sections of line-like objects of the same ob-
ject type to form a single object by transferring the relevant parameters of
the selected section to neighbouring sections.
One possible application is, for example, to connect imported road sec-
tions or buildings which have been generated in an external software as
multiple auxiliary polygons not having identical frist and last points.
When connecting lines certain conditions can be defined. Activate the re-
spective polygon section with the right mouse button and select the com-
mand Connect Lines from the context menu.

Activate the relevant options in the dialog box and confirm with OK. The
affected sections will be joined forming a single object.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

398
11.11 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Connect Lines

Options

Snap Radius Enter the radius of the circle within which a connection point is to be sear-
ched. This snap radius is the maximum distance between the final points to
be connected.

Check Height With this option activated, the snap radius will also relate to the 3-D dis-
tance (z-coordinate) instead of only to the 2-D distance (x/y-coordinate).

Search at first/last According to the options chosen, the search will be one-way or two-way.
point

Search recursively With this option activated, CadnaA will, after having connected two lines,
search from the open point of the next line (etc.) as long as the given re-
quirements are fulfilled.

Check ID With this option activated only lines with identical ID will be connected.

Strategy for You can choose which of several possible lines shall be connected.
Ambiguities
See also Chapter 12 - Context Menu and Chapter 11 - Modify Objects.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Transformation 11.12 399

11.12 Transformation
The transformation of objects and/or entire projects is a powerful feature
of CadnaA.
When files are imported, differences in the coordinate systems may have Import files from third-
to be taken into account. Therefore, coordinate transformations are offered party programs 11.12.0
for all import formats in CadnaA (button “Transformation“).
Furthermore, the coordinate transformation can be applied to duplicate, to Duplicate, displace,
relocate, or to rotate a group of objects. rotate,distortobjects11.12.0

The feature is available from the dialog Modify Object, action „Transfor-
mation“. or from the context menu of objects. Via the dialog Modify Ob-
jects several objects - also from different object types - can be transformed
or even duplicated (via the option „Keep Original“). When selecting this
command from the context menu just the object selected will be transfor-
med or duplicated.
The following types of transformation are available:
• rotation + translation,
• match points,
• afine transformation,
• geodetic transformation,
• general transformation,
• interactive transformation (by using the mouse).
The interactive transformation is not available via the context menu of ob-
jects.
For further details check for the CadnaA-reference manual, chapter 7.3.4
Coordinate Transformation.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

400
11.12 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Transformation

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Convert to 11.13 401

11.13 Convert to
Object types can be converted to other object types. For example, you can
convert a road to a railway, a contour line to a barrier, a building to foliage
or to a built-up area. Existing parameters are retained where this makes
sense.
In order to convert, e.g. the previously mentioned parallel barriers along
the road to contour lines, select one barrier using the right mouse button to
open the context menu, and click the Convert to command.
A pop-up menu appears, listing all object types available. Click „Contour
Line“. This converts the barrier to a contour line with the barrier
coordinates and height being applied to the contour line.

You can now easily re-locate the road to lie on an embankment.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

402
11.13 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Convert to

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Rails 11.14 403

11.14 Generate Rails

By the command Generate Rails parallel tracks including the gravel bed
are generated automatically. This action is available on the dialog Modify
Objects and on the context menu of the object "Railway".

Dialog Generate Rails

On the dialog the following paramaters are editable:

• Number of lanes: number of parallel tracks of the entire rail track
• Distance between center lines (m)
• Ballast height (m): height above terrain; will replace the default height
above rail top edge of 0.6 m (Geometry: „height at every point“).
• Additional ballast width (m): width of the ballast, measured from the
rail tracks axis.
total width of track bed = distance between center lines + 2 * additional
track ballast width (on the following example: 6.5 + 2 * 1.5 = 9 m)
• Ballast slope: lateral slope of the ballast (default: 0.66 = 1:1.5)
• Additional track bed width (m): additional width on the level of the
previously mentioned terrain, measured from the lower contour line of
the ballast slope.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

404
11.14 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Rails

Example By using the values as specified above a railtrack as illustrated results (di-
mensions added):

Sectional view resp. on vertical grid:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Station 11.15 405

11.15 Generate Station

The action Generate Station enables to generate marks alongside of line-
like objects. The station’s distance specified refers to the distance from sta-
tion to station. Stations can be generated either via the command Generate
Station on the context menu, or on the dialog Modify Object, action „Ge-
nerate Station“.
This feature is convenient, e. g. for placing kilometer or distance-marks at
roads:
• To this end, click the road with the right mouse button, and select
Generate Station from the context menu.
• In the dialog that opens, specify the distance between the individual
stations.

Upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, CadnaA generates stations along
the road with the specified distance between stations.

Road with stations

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

406
11.15 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Station

Indicated distance The distance indicated at each station is the total of preceding distances
summed up from station to station. On the example, the stationing starts at
50 m and continues from station to station summing up the values.
To display values with reference to road kilometers, specify this by ente-
ring in kilometers on the Geometry-dialog of that road („Station“).
• Open the Road dialog by double-clicking the road axis.
• Click the „Geometry“ button.
• At the bottom of the dialog, enter the starting point of the stationing in
metres.
• Furthermore, the counting order (ascending/descending) can be selec-
ted from the list box.

Example: The stationing starts from 10 km = 10000 m.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Station 11.15 407

Upon closing the dialog by clicking OK, you have to update the dimensio- Update Sta-
ning in kilometers via the menu command Tables|Miscellaneous|Update tion 11.15.0
Station.

The station mark then displays the kilometres and metres separated by a
plus sign. If you wish to insert only single stations, use the pertinent tool-
box icon, and click at the desired locations.

For every line source stations can be defined via the dialog Geometry, op- Parallel Object
tion „Station“. The default setting for the initial point is 0. However, this between
can be defined by the user (in meters). defined station
marks 11.15.0
With the Parallel Object command from the context menu you can define
a starting and an end point related to the Station Range.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

408
11.15 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Station

Example • Insert a road and enter on the Geometry dialog a station start point of
12.000 m ascending. The starting point of the road is now 12 km.
• Close the dialog with OK.
• Generate the station marks for the road (click onto the road with the
right mouse button and from the context menu choose Generate Sta-
tion).
• Define a distance of 10 m and confirm with OK.
The station marks are generated.

• Choose Parallel Object from the context menu.

• Enter „right from the active object“ at a distance of 10 m and a height
of 4 m.
• Activate the option „Station Range“ and enter values from 12020 to
12050 m.
• Click OK.
A barrier will be generated at a distance of 10 m from the road’s axis (seen
from the frist point) with a height of 4 m and a length of 30 m between sta-
tion marks 12020 and 12050 m.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Building Evaluation 11.16 409

11.16 Generate Building Evaluation

With this action the building evaluation symbol is assigned to buildings
automatically. Both, the object "Building" and the object "Cylinder" can
be used to model buildings. The building evaluation symbol is generated
inside the borders of every building.

Automatically generated building evaluation symbols inside the building’s borders

When generating building evaluation symbols in this way, the name, the
ID, and the contents of the building’s/cylinder’s memo-window will be co-
pied to the respective building evaluation symbol.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

410
11.16 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Building Evaluation

Name and ID copied from the building

On a subsequent calculation the facade levels are calculated according to

the specifications on the dialog Building Noise Map (Options menu) for
any building having the building evaluation symbol assigned to.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Label 11.17 411

11.17 Generate Label

This option automatically generates a text box located at the object dis-
playing an object parameter.
Mark the object and select the command Generate Label
1. on the context menu of an object or
2. for several and/or different objects via the dialog Modify Objects,
action „Generate Label“.

The placement defines the alignment of the content inside the label. Placement 11.17.0
Select the relevant attribute by clicking in the list box. The range of attri- Attribute 11.17.0
butes in the list box depends on the selected object type. If you execute the
command via the dialog Modify Objects to label several objects at once,
just a restricted range of attributes will be offered.
The font alignment, size and type can be adopted in the dialog by clicking Textbox 11.17.0
the same-named button (see Chapter 9.12.1 in the CadnaA-reference ma-
nual).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

412
11.17 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Label

Example 11.17.0 If you select the attribute ID in the list box, the string entered in the object
dialog in the edit box ID will be placed in the label.

User defined 11.17.0 The attribute <user-defined> allows the issue of several object parameters
by entry of the relevant attributes in the code box. If you have selected an
attribute in the list box, you can see the actual notation of this attribute
[#(ObjAtt,%1,Parameter)]. If you want to issue more than one object para-
meter in the label, just enter the actual notation of this attribute into the
code box. You can also enter additional text.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Label 11.17 413

#(ObjAtt, %1, GRENZT, 1, 0.500) dB(A) / #(ObjAtt, Example: Entry in

%1, LPT, 1, 0.500) dB(A) Code Box

will, after calculation at the receiver point, generate a label with e.g. the
content "50 dB(A) / 41,9 dB(A)", because the daytime maximum (stan-
dard) value of this receiver point is 50 dB(A) and the calculated sound le-
vel for daytime is rated at 41,9 dB(A).
The parameters of the attribute GRENZT,1, 0.500 mean:
• GRENZT = limiting valuie daytime
• 1 = one digit after the decimal point will be issued
• 0.500 = rounding up of first decimal starting from 5
for further available expressions see Chapter 11.3.3 "String Variable" in
the CadnaA-reference manual).

You may display information from the info-box e.g. of the receiver String
point. Enter the same string in the variable-box as you did in the info-box. Variable 11.17.0
First select „(String variable)“ from the attribute list box.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

414
11.17 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Label

Example Assume, in the memo-window of the dialog Building the floor number of
buildings are defined, e.g. x=2; x=5 etc. In this case „x“ is the text variab-
le. These figures you would like to display at the building, however, with
the text string „floor no.“ going in front.
To this end, select „(String variable)“ first and enter x into the variable
box. Now, switch to „(user defined)“ and write into the code box - in front
of the existing code - the text string „floor no. =“.

Open OK the lables will shows the text strings „floor no. = 2“, „floor no.=
5“ etc.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Floors 11.18 415

11.18 Generate Floors

The action „Generate Floors“ on dialog Modify Objects or the equivalent
command on the contect menu of receiver points or point sources enables
to automatically generate receivers or point sources with pre-defined
storey heights.
To this end proceed as follows:
• Enter a receiver point attached to a building’s facade (e.g. with use of
the Object Snap feature)
• On the edit dialog of the receiver point enter on dialog „Geometry“ the
height of the receiver above ground and close the dialogs.
• Click with the right mouse button on that receiver and select from the
context menu the command Generate Floors. The pertinent dialog is
displayed.

Dialog Generate Floors

• On the dialog Generate Floors the required range of storeys can be

selected. In the lower part of the dialog, the distance from ground floor
to first floor („EG-1.OG“), and between upper floors („OG-OG“) can
be specified.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

416
11.18 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Generate Floors

Append Name of With the control box „Append Name of Floor“ being activated CadnaA
Floor extends upon OK the receiver’s name by the designation of the storey. The
designations used are:
• EG: ground floor
• 1.OG: first floor
• 2.OG: second floor
• etc.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Parallel Object 11.19 417

11.19 Parallel Object

This command can be applied to any open or closed polygon. Execute the
command either directly from the context menu of an object or via Modify
Object.
This command generates a new object of the selected type parallel to the
selected object. It can be defined whether the new object shall be genera-
ted to the left or to the right or to both sides of the selected object.
Furthermore, the distance of the new object from the geometrical xis of the
selected object has to be specified. The meaning of „left“ and „right“ re-
fers to a view point from first to last point.

To enter, for example, parallel barriers for the road section illustrated abo-
ve, select the road using the right mouse button and, on the context menu
which appears, click the Parallel Object command. In the following dia-
log, enter the relevant parameters.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

418
11.19 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Parallel Object

* For roads and railways the axis is the reference line for the distance
of the parallel object.

raod with parallel barrier

Polygon around If you execute the command Parallel Object at an open polygon, e.g., at
line-objects the object „Road“, and if you choose a closed polygon as object type, e.g.,
the object „Designated Land Use“, and if you also choose the option
„Left“ and „Right“ from the object, CadnaA places then the closed poly-
gon over or under the road.
Example In the figure below three parts of roads (1, 2 and 3) are displayed. With the
command Parallel Object the object „Designated Land Use“ has been in-

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Parallel Object 11.19 419

serted „over“ the road part 2 with the option „Object Type: Designated
Land Use“, left and right, distance 30 m.

In case a road is made from several polygon points not all of which are to
be enclosed by the parallel object proceed as follows. First, break the road
into pieces applying the command Break into pieces from the context
menu of the road.
• Select on the dialog Break into pieces the option „Split at polygon
points“ and close by OK.

• Select from the context menu of the center road the command Parallel
Object and specify the object type „Area of Land Use“.
• Enter a distance of 30 m with „left“ and „right“ activated.
• Close the dialog by OK.
The area of land use will be generated at a distance of 30 m around the
middle road section.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

420
11.19 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Parallel Object

Station Range If you also define a Station Range, the parallel object will only be genera-
ted in this defined range (see Chapter 11.15 "Generate Station"). In case
the height of the original line object is defined with the first and last point
the height for the created parallel object will be interpolated also but consi-
dering the defined station section.
Example In this example, parallel barrier along a road is generated based on pre-de-
fined stations.
• Select the command Generate Stations from the context menu of a
road.
• On the dialog Generate Stations specify a distance between stations of
10 meters, activate option „right from ...“, and close by OK.
• Now, select from the context menu of the road the command Parallel
Object.
• Specify a parallel barrier to the left of the raod with a height of 6 m bet-
ween stations 70 and 120 meters and click OK.

oad with parallel barrier withinb stations from 70 to 140 meters

Parallel Object via You may also apply this command via dialog Modify Object, action „Par-
dialog „Modify allel Object“. This is useful whenparallel barriers are to be generated for
Objects“ several indepedant road sections. In this case, the stations have to be defi-
ned for all respective roads.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Activation 11.20 421

11.20 Activation
With the Action:Activation of Modify Objects from the context menu
you may change the activations (see Chapter 4.4.2, ID) of all desired ob-
jects without opening the object dialog. On the Activation dialog the left
check boxes shows the possible status of activation, the right one the actu-
al status after execution of the action.

The specified objects are deactivated after

execution of this command.

Choose from the listbox the activation status. All corresponding objects
will be switched to this status, no matter what status they had before.
When selecting „inactive“ all the concerned objects - no matter what status
they had before - will be deactivated. This is also visible from the „blank“
activation boxes to the right of the arrows (->).
When selecting „indeterminate“ the objects are neither activated, nor inac-
tiveted (default setting).
When selecting „general“, you may decide individually on the new activa-
tion status by clicking on the check boxes to the right. This enables to defi-
ne the activation status after execution of the comamnd for each of the
three activation stit (to the left) individually by clicking on the check bo-
xes to the right.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

422
11.20 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Activation

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Swap Name/ID 11.21 423

11.21 Swap Name/ID

With the command Swap Name/ID on dialog Modify Object you can ex-
cange, e.g., the entry of the box „Name“ and „ID“ in the object dialog.
Depending on the file format this maybe necessary after importing a file
from a GIS-system, a file e.g. like DXF with a Dxf-handle. Such systems
store non geometrical data in a seperate database. In order to merge the da-
ta, like the distance of a road or the number of cars, with the real graphical
object, the IDs have to be identical in both files.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

424
11.21 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Swap Name/ID

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Delete Duplicates 11.22 425

11.22 Delete Duplicates

This command from the dialog Modify Objects enables to delte duplica-
tes of objects based on specifiable criteria. This function is useful after im-
port from third-party programs like e.g. ArcView or DXF. You can select
the object type concerned,e.g. just for roads.

After confirming with OK a further dialog opens in which you can choose
conditions for the deletion.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

426
11.22 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Delete Duplicates

Having chosen several conditions, then all conditions are evaluated prior
to the deltion with all duplicates. The first object placed in the object table
is considered to be the original twhile subsequent are supposed to be the
duplicates.
The duplicate is deleted only if the condition/s is/are met. In case several
conditions are specified all of them must be fulfilled before the duplicates
are deleted (logical AND). As restricting condition the following specifac-
tions can be used, individually or as a combination:
• Name
• ID
• Geometry:
- Snap: Enter a deviation (snap in meters). Objects which deviate not
more than the given snap distance from the original will be deleted.
- Polygons bidirectional: With this option activated duplicates will also
be deleted when they match based on the specified citeria, but differ
with first/last geometry point.
- 2D only: With this option activated duplicates will also be deleted
when they do not match with height coordinate/s (z), but match with
xy-coordinates based on the specified citeria.
• Keep Object with max. Weight: This option enables to define a cri-
terion based on object attributes to control the deletion procedure.
- Weight Function: Here you can select from the available object attri-
butes in order to define a weighting function.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Fit DGM to Object 11.23 427

11.23 Fit DGM to Object

The height information of objects (e.g. roads, buildings) and of the terrain
(height points, contour lines) frequently results from different sources. It
happens frequently that the imported absolute object heights (e.g. road
heights) do not match with the terrain heights e.g due to less resolution).
In these cases the terrain model can be fit to the roads (or also to other ob-
jects) by CadnaA.
In the following example a road modeled from two polygon points crosses Example
a wavy terrain. Since the road has both, at first and last point the correct
height of 0 m, the road receives a height of 0 m along its entire length. The
road, therefore, intersects with the wavy terrain completely.

Road from two polygon points iwth a wavy terrain

When selecting the action „Fit DTM to object“ on dialog Modify Objects
(or from the context menu of line-like or area-like objects) the following
dialog is displayed:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

428
11.23 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Fit DGM to Object

Dialog Fit DTM to Object

On the dialog Fit DTM to Object the following input boxes are available:
• Width/Additional Width (m): additional width for totral width left/right
of the object at the same height
• Sampling Distance (m): distance between new height points being
inserted alongside of the object
• Far diffracting Edge: This can be specified based upon
- Distance from Curb (m): In this case the distance of diffracting edge
is fixed while the slope varies.
- Slope 1:x (gradient): In this case the slope is constant while the dis-
tance of the diffracting edge varies.
When fitting the terrain to the road automatically using this feature the re-
sult will be for this example as illustrated below:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Fit DGM to Object 11.23 429

Road after applying the actio „Fit DTM to Object“

The 3D-special-view shows that the hills have been cut, while the valleys
have been filled up.
Correcting for the terrain model manually would be far to time consuming.
The automatic fitting procedure is the only relastic alternative. It has to be
decided, however, in each case whether this command is useful as the enti-
re terrain model is modified.
This command being selected from the context menu of an individual line-
like or area-like object will be just applied to that object.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

430
11.23 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Fit DGM to Object

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Fit Object to DGM 11.24 431

11.24 Fit Object to DGM

The height information of objects (e.g. roads, buildings) and of the terrain
(height points, contour lines) frequently results from different sources. It
happens frequently that the imported absolute object heights (e.g. road
heights) do not match with the terrain heights e.g due to less resolution).
In these cases the roads (or also other objects) can be fit to the terrain mo-
del automatically by CadnaA. This is achieved by inserting new polygon
points to the object’s geometry the z-coordinate of which results from the
local terrain height.
In the following example a road modeled from two polygon points crosses Example
a wavy terrain. Since the road has both, at first and last point the correct
height of 0 m, the road receives a height of 0 m along its entire length. The
road, therfore, intersects with the wavy terrain completely.

Road from two polygon points iwth a wavy terrain

When applying the action „Fit Object to DTM“ from the dialog Modify
Objects (or from the context menu of an object) the result is as illustrated
below:

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

432
11.24 Chapter 11 - Modify Objects
Fit Object to DGM

Road after applying the actio „Fit Object to DTM“

By the options on the dialog Modify Objects this action can be addressed
to specified object types only - e.g. to a specific road - or to all objects of
an object class - e.g. all roads in a project.
This command being selected from the context menu of an individual line-
like or area-like object will be just applied to that object.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 12 - Context Menu 433

Chapter 12 - Context Menu

By selecting an object on the main window while in the edit mode, or by

selecting a data record in a table, using the right instead of the left mouse
button, a context menu is opened offering a number of commands refering
to the selected object.

Select an objects with the right mouse button displays the context menu

The following commands are available from the context menu depending Commands
on object type. The links listed with each command erfer - when nothing
different is specified - to the respective sections of this CadnaA-introduc-
tory manual.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

434 Chapter 12 - Context Menu

3D-Special-View Graphical 3-D view with hidden lines, taking into account the visibility of
the individual surfaces. You can also edit the objects in this view directly
and you may move through this scenario either by pressing the Return key
or by using the arrow keys on the keyboard (see Chapter 12.4).
Break Areas A closed polygon can be divided into several smaller areas with identical
parameters (see Chapter 12.6).
Break Lines A line-like object is divided into at least two objects with identical para-
meters (see Chapter 12.5).
Fit DTM to Object CadnaA calculates the heights of objects and of the terrain at the pertinent
polygon points of the objects. For the area in-between, a linear interpolati-
on is performed (see Chapter 11.23).
Duplicate Several objects of identical properties and the same size are inserted in ho-
rizontal and/or vertical rows (see Chapter 11.3).
Edit Opens an edit object dialog (alternatively: double-click an object with the
left mouse button (see Chapter 12.1).
Insert before/after A new row is inserted in a table before or after the selected row. Another
alternative is to press INS key (see Chapter 11.2.2 in the CadnaA-refe-
rence manual).
Generate Lable This option generates the issue of object parameters to be defined within
an automatically generated Text box located at the object. You can do that
for only one object, for all objects of the same object type or for all object
types (see Chapter 11.17).
Generate Inserts station marks at a desired spacing along a line-like object, with in-
Station dication of distances, e. g. marking of roads by kilometres (see Chapter
11.15).
Force An arbitrary polygon with different angles can be transformed into a poly-
Right Angles gon with right angles by specifying a snap angle (see Chapter 11.5).
Force Rectangle An arbitrary quadrangle can be transformed into a rectangle (see Chapter
11.4).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 12 - Context Menu 435

This command enables you to snap point shaped objects (e.g. point source Snap Point to facade
or receiver point) onto a building facade after the point has been inserted
or imported. The points are then attached to the facade at the distance de-
finded (see Chapter 11.6).
Generates a building with sound-radiating facades and roof (see Chapter Generate building
3.3.4 in the CadnaA-reference manual).
In the Info field of the object edit dialog you can insert hyperlinks for files, Hyperlink
pictures, music, video, internet homepages etc. which you then can open
easily by just one mouse click (see Chapter 4.4.2).
The length of any line-like object can be specified (see Chapter 12.7). Specify Length
Calculation according to the Germany guideline RLS90 for Long Straight Long Straight Road
Road (see Chapter 2.11 in the CadnaA-reference manual)
Deletes the selected object - another alternative: press DEL KEY (see Chap- Delete
ter 11.1).
CadnaA calculates the heights of objects and of the terrain at the pertinent Fit Object to DTM
polygon points of the objects. For the area in-between, a linear interpolati-
on is performed (see Chapter 11.24).
Different actions can be executed simultaneously on several objects and Modify Objects
also on different object-types or groups of objects. Some actions can also
be enforced on individual objects alone. These are then directly obvious in
the context-menu (see Chapter 12.2).
Generation of objects parallel to the object selected (see Chapter 11.19). Parallel Object
This command eables to modify the sequence of polygon points of poly- Modify Order of
gon objects (see Chapter 11.7). Points

Deletes grid-points inside or outside of a calculation area (see Chapter Delete Grid-Points
5.5.1 in the CadnaA-reference manual)

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

436 Chapter 12 - Context Menu

Air Pollution CadnaA enables you to calculate air pollution caused by road traffic ac-
cording to the MLuS 92, edition 96 /46/ (see Chapter 2.9.10 in the Cadn-
aA-reference manual).

Generate Rails A railroad track from parallel rails including the ballast bed is generated
automatically (see Chapter 11.14).
Cross Section Sectional view along a line (see Chapter 12.3)
Sort Sorting of table columns in ascending or descending order, numerical or
alphanumerical (see Chapter 11.2.4 in the CadnaA-reference manual).
Edit Column Conversion of numerical values or substitution of character strings in table
columns (see Chapter 11.2.5 in the CadnaA-reference manual).
Spline A selected polygon line is replaced by the segmented curve of a cubic po-
lynomial (see Chapter 11.8)
Simplify Geometry Geometrical objects are simplified for calculation purposes by reducing
the degree to which details are taken into account (see Chapter 11.9)
Generate Floors Automatic generation of a vertical row of receiver points with correspon-
ding heights for the different floors (see Chapter 11.18)
Transformation The transforming of objects and/or complete projects is a strong aid und
distinguishes CadnaA in a special way (see Chapter 11.12).
Convert to An object type can be converted to another one (see Chapter 11.13).
Connect Lines Individual parts of line-like objects of the same object type can be connec-
ted to a single object (see Chapter 11.11).
Pass-By-Level For roads, railways, and other line-like sources, you can also calculate the
time characteristic of the sound pressure level that would result if a single
vehicle with a specified emission were to travel along a certain path (see
Chapter 2.14 in the CadnaA-reference manual).
Break into pieces Line shape objects are split into definable parts with identical parameters
(see Chapter 11.10).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 12 - Context Menu 437

12.1 Edit Object Dialog

An edit dialog of an object serves to enter all parameters characterising an
object.

Example of an Object Dialog

The desired values are entered in the boxes either from the keyboard or au-
tomatically by selecting the relevant options.
Different boxes and options are available depending both on the object
type and on the selected calculation standard. The individual boxes are ac-
cessed by pressing the TAB key or by clicking.
Some boxes are equation boxes in which the equation will be calculated
promptly and the result displayed in the box „Result.PWL“ for Day, Eve-
ning, and Night.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

438 Chapter 12 - Context Menu

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Modify Objects 12.2 439

12.2 Modify Objects

This command selectable from the context menu of an object enables to
address various actions to a single or groups of objects. When being selec-
ted from the context menu of a closed polygon the command refers to all
objects inside, outside, or on (i.e. crossing) this polygon.
The actions may be applied to an individual object as well. In this case,
these actions are listed on object’s context menu.

Dialog Modify Objects

For the general features on the dialog Modify Objects and all available
actions see Chapter 11 - Modify Objects.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

440
12.2 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Modify Objects

Actions with point When the command Modify Objects is selected from the context menu of
and line objects a point or a line object the subsequent action will be addressed to all ob-
jects besides the one which the command was selected from.
Example: delete all point sources besides just a single one
Procedure:
• select from the context menu of the point source to be kept the com-
mand Modify Objects,
• action: Delete,
• range: all
• object type: point source
Upon OK alle point sources will be deleted, besides the one the context
menu of which was used to start the action from.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Cross Section 12.3 441

12.3 Cross Section

The command Cross Section is available on the context menu of line
objects (e.g. from the auxiliary polygon) provided the object is made of
not more than two polygon points. A height has to be entered for this
object which will be considered as the upper edge of the cross section.
Upon selection of this command the vertical cross section from first to last
point will be displayed in a separate dialog showing the terrain contour
and a objects cut.

Dialog Cross Section

Source: With that option being activated the sources cut by the section are Options on the dia-
displayed. By default, this option is activated. log

Ray: The ray’s path from start to end point - as considered by the software
within the calculation - is displayed. By default, this option is deactivated.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

442
12.3 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Cross Section

Z-Factor: The z-coordinates of all objects displayed are multiplied by the

z-factor entered. This faciliates to distinguish height differences.
Copy: The picture is copied to the clipboard.
All further options correspond to those of the vertical grid.
Upon saving of the cross section via the button „OK+Save“ the
representation including - if any - calculated vertical grid is save to the
object group „Vertical Grid“ as well. This copy receives the ID
„CROSS_SECTION“ (see menu Tables|Miscellaneous)
see also:
• chapter 5.3 Vertical Grid in this manual
• chapter 9.13 Cross Section and 5.5.6 Vertical Receiver Grid in the Cad-
naA-reference manual

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
3D (Special) 12.4 443

12.4 3D (Special)
The 3D-Special view in CadnaA enables to display the entire model consi-
dering hidden objects and the actual terrain shape.
The camera point can be defined using pre-defined paths or it can be mo-
ved freely within the model by use of the keyboard and the mouse. Provi-
ded a camera path has been defined the camera drive can be repeated
easily and also can be saved as an AVI video file.

Model with a road on a bridge with a causeway made from terrain contours

The 3D-Special view may also serve as a checking tool: Using it you can
check visually for object’s geometry enabling to discover errors in your
model more easily. In case you would like to modify properties of an ob-
ject double-click the respective object to get access to its edit dialog. Thus,
modifications can directly be performed without closing the 3D-Special
view. Chnages to the geometry will be updated straight away.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

444
12.4 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
3D (Special)

Enabling 3D-Spe- The 3D-Special view is activated by clicking with the right mouse button
cial view 12.4.0 on an object and selecting the command 3D-Special from the context me-
nu. To this end, the edit mode has to be activated (CTRL+E).
You can move through your model by pressing the forward/backwards-ar-
row keys on your keyboard. By keeping the left mouse button depressed
the angle of and the flight direction can be controlled.
For more details when moving around in your model please consult chap-
ter 9.16 Paths of 3D Special View in the CadnaA-reference manual.

Terraintexture12.4.0 Activated bitmaps - imported into CadnaA as a background image - will

be displayed as a ground texture on 3D-Special view. This holds as well
for bitzmapos being imported from GoogleEarth CadnaA (see chapter 9.2
Importing Bitmap from GoogleEarth™ in this manual).
see also:
• Chapter 9.15 3D-Special View and 9.16 Paths of 3D Special View in
the CadnaA-reference manual

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Break Lines 12.5 445

12.5 Break Lines

This command from the context menu can be applied to any open polygon.
Line-shaped objects, such as line sources, roads, railways, contour lines,
etc. can be broken into separate sections. This splits an object into two ob-
jects with identical properties. Breaking down a line object is useful, if,
e. g., the parameters of the sections are supposed to be different. You can
achieve this by using this command and editing the properties of the new
section.
The breaking of line-shaped objects is done by drawing a line with only a
start and end point which intersects the line-shaped object at the point
where it is to be broken. Such a line can be generated, e. g., by selecting
the auxiliary polygon, or any other line-like object, from the toolbox.

This railway is divided into 2 sections, for example, to

allocate a different type of track to one railway section.

First click the Auxiliary Polygon tool. Then generate a line by clicking on
both sides of the point you want to breake.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

446
12.5 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Break Lines

Now switch to the Edit Mode, and click the line just generated using the
right mouse button. From the context menu, select the Break Lines com-
mand.
The railway now consists of two sections, which can be shown by deleting
one of them.

* Deactivated objects are not broken by this command.

* Line objects do not break area objects.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Break Areas 12.6 447

12.6 Break Areas

This action is available from the context menu of closed polygons. The
area used as cutting object may cover the area to be cut partially or may
also be entirely inside the area to be cut. Like the command Break Lines
(see Chapter 12.5) also lines are broken, besides areas, by the command
Break Areas.
The area 1 (here: area source) shall be broken by area 2 (here: parking lot). Example 1
• Enter an aera source and an overlapping parking lot as illustrated.

• Select them command Break Areas from the context menu of area 2.

Consequently, area 1 is cut - in this example - into three parts.

• Click on border of area 2 being located inside area 1.
The dialog Select Object is displayed:

Dialog Select Object

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

448
12.6 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Break Areas

• Click once onto the second object from the top down and click on but-
ton „Mark“ afterwards.
• When have closed the dialog the part of the area source being cut can
be relocated.

Relocated part of the area being cut

• Delete this part been cut via its context menu (or by the DEL-key) and
delete the second lower part of the area source been cut.

Result: area 2 breaks area 1

Example 2 Starting from the same initial situation, the command Break Areas been
selected from the context menu of area 1 causes area 2 to get broken. The
result is illustrated on the following figure.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Break Areas 12.6 449

Result: area 1 breaks area 2

In this example, the cutting area is entirely inside the area to be broken. Example 3
• Enter two buildings - one inside the other - having 8 m height as illust-
rated below.

Initial situation: building inside building

• Select from the context menu of area 2 (inner building) the command
Break Areas.
Subsequently, small inner area punches a „hole“ into the larger outer area.
The connecting line is a small „channel“ enabling to draw the new ring po-
lygon from a single closed poylgon.
• When clicking on the inner ring polygon three building objects are dis-
played on the dialog Select Object.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

450
12.6 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Break Areas

Action „Break Areas“ generates three buildings

• Delete the last two entries from the list on dialog Select Object.
Finally, in the file just a single building remains.

Result: area 2 breaks area 1

• Press the key-combination CTRL+3 to display the building with cour-

tyard in 3D-Special view.

3D-Special view of the building (as a ring polygon)

* Deactivated objects are not broken by the command Break Areas.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Specify Length 12.7 451

12.7 Specify Length

By this context menu command the exact length of all line-shaped objects
can be specified, such as roads, railways, line sources, and also of the ver-
tical area source, etc.
• First, enter the line-like object with its approximate length.
• Then click this object under the Edit Mode using the right mouse but-
ton, and, from the context menu, select the command Specify Length.
This results in the line-like object being extended beyond or cut off before
the last entered point.
see also:
chapter 4.2.1 Inserting Objects Using the Mouse, section „Segment
Length“

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

452
12.7 Chapter 12 - Context Menu
Specify Length

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options 453

Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options

CadnaA is a modular software program. The basic software is linked to

optional modules extending its range of application.
For example, the calculated noise level in the vicinity of an airport can be
added to the level due to a railway line and/or due to roads and an overall
noise map can be generated.
The CadnaA basic software program is a prerequisite for all further opti-
ons being described in this chapter.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

454 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options 455

13.1 Option BMP

The program option CadnaA-BMP enables bitmap-files to be imported in
various formats serving as a background picture. The most common appli-
cation of CadnaA-BMP is importing scanned maps used as a template for
entering sound sources, receiver points, and other objects. Furthermore,
digital or digitized photographs (orthophotos) in TIFF-or JPEG-format can
be imported. The number of importable images depends on the memory
space available and on the images' resolution.
A further, very comfortable feature offered by CadnaA-BMP is the option
enabling to import bitmaps from GoogleEarth. This feature requires the
software GoogleEarth been installed on your PC and the CadnaA-object
coordinates entered in a knowm national or international geodetic coordi-
nate system.

Imported bitmap

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

456 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options

When importing a bitmap-file CadnaA just references the file name and its
path. The bitmap-file itself is not stored in the CadnaA-file. Even when
moving the project file and the bitmap to a different folder on the harddri-
ve, CadnaA will still locate the bitmap-file as long as it is stored together
with the project file in the same folder.

Orthophoto being imported as backgroiund image

Main Features Main features of CadnaA-BMP:

• import of scanned maps of arbitrary size
• size of the bitmap is just restricted by memory space available
• shifting, turning and transformation durting import ("Calibrate
Bitmap")
• automatic positioning and geo-referencing (requires file containg coor-
dinate transformation data)
• import of bitmaps from GoogleEarth.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options 457

List of supported file formats: Supported File

Formats
• BMP (Windows Bitmap) • PCT (Macintosh QuickDraw)
• CALS Raster (Computer Aided • PCX (Paintbrush Bitmap Graphic)
Acquisition and Logistics Support) • PNG (Portable Network Graphics)
• DCX (Graphics Multipage PCX • PSD (Photoshop)
Bitmap) • PSP (PaintShop)
• DWF (Autodesk Design Web For-
• RAS (SUN Raster)
mat)
• TARGA (Truevision TGA)
• ECW (Enhanced Compression
Wavelet)
• TIFF (Tagged Image Format File)
• EPS (Encapsulated PostScript, Post- • TIFF CCITT (auch Gruppe 3 und 4)
Script Raster) • WinFax Group 3 und 4
• GIF (Graphic Interchange Format) • WMF (Windows Metafile)
• IMG (GEM Image) • WMZ (Windows Compressed
• IOCA (ICA) Metafile)
• JFIF, JPEG, JTIF (JPEG File Inter-
• WPG, VWPG (WordPerfect raster
files & vector raster files)
change Format, Joint Photographic
Experts Group, JPEG Tagged Inter- • SCT (Foxpro Screen)
change Format Image) • SFF (Fritz Fax-Print File)
• LEAD CMP (1-bit LEAD com- • SGI (Silicon Graphics IRIS Graphic
pressed format) File)
• MAC (MacPaint) • WBMP (Wireless Bitmap File For-
• MSP (Microsoft Paint) mat)
• MPT (Multipage TIFF) • XWD, XBM, XPM (X-Bitmap Gra-
• OS/2 Bitmap phic, IrfanView/GIMP)
• PCD (Kodak PhotoCD Files)

and even some more.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

458 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option BPL 13.2 459

13.2 Option BPL

The option CadnaA-BPL is a comfortable way for optimization of emitted
sound power by area sources when planning industrial or commercial
areas. The sound radiated from different areas is optimized in such way
that the limiting values at all receiver points are not exceeded. The proce-
dure of distributing the noise emission for all area sources respecting the
limits is known as "Fixing of Noise Quota".
Furthermore, this option is quite useful to calibrate area sources the pres-
sure level of which at distinct receiver points is known or has been measu-
red, while the sound power level (SPL) or the SPL per unit area is
unknown. CadnaA-BPL handles even situations with several area sources
and receiver points by applying a user-definable optimization strategy.

Site with three optimizable sources

The option CadnaA-BPL optimizes the noise emission in the most com-
fortable way. In CadnaA, a specific source type called "optimisable sour-
ce" offers a flexible approach without restricting the user to a fixed
predefined optimization strategy. To achieve this a "usability function" is
defined for each area source.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

460
13.2 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option BPL

Main Features The main features of CadnaA-BPL are:

• The sound propagation by the "optimisable source" is equivalent to an
area source, also with respect to segmentation without or with scree-
ning.
• The screening effect by objects inside the optimisable source can be
deactivated with regard to ist own emission.
• switching of the evaluation period day/night
• input of LWA or LWA" alternatively
• specific usability-function for each area
• noise emission restrictable by MIN- and MAX-values
• optimization of noise emission: manually or automatically

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option XL 13.3 461

13.3 Option XL
For noise mapping of larger areas the option CadnaA-XL offers a variety
of additional features to evaluate results calculated on receiver grids, to
specify population density and to assess noise load. With these features
CadnaA in conjunction with CadnaA-XL is the optimal tool for the gene-
ration of strategic noise maps according to the EC-Environmental Noise
Directive (END) 2002/49/EG of 25 June 2002. Futhermore, CadnaA-XL
is suitable for all kinds of noise mapping of large areas (e.g. for cities).

Noise map for aircraft and road noise, daytime

Main features of CadnaA-XL: Main Features

• unlimited number a screening objects (in CadnaA-standard version
restricted to 1000 buildings and 1000 barriers)
• calculation of strategic noise maps according to EC-directive
• conflict maps
• source maps
• grid evaluation
• estimation of population density
• grid arithmetics
• object-scan and the
• functions „Close Polygons“ and „Delete Height Points“.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

462
13.3 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option XL

Range of Some of the key features of CadnaA-XL are explained by the following
Application examples.
Building Evaluation According to the German Guidelines for Noise Protection along Roads
and Building Noise (RLS-90) it has to be evaluated for which storeys of a building the limiting
Map values are exceeded and which noise level is expected at the most exposed
facade during day- and nighttime. In CadnaA this evaluation can also be
performed for all other available standards or guidelines on road noise, and
for all other noise types (industry, railway, aircraft).

Calculated facade levels at the specified facade points

The building evaluation symbol has to be placed into the contour of each
building. By this flexible concept of CadnaA the settings for a building
evaluation and the building noise map can be configured to the user's
needs:
• definable location of facade points: min./max. facade length, distance
from facade
• applicable also to buildings with by-windows and to cylinderical buil-
dings
• user-definable high of the ground floor and of storey height

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option XL 13.3 463

• serveral averaging methods (maximum or minimum value, energetic or

arithmethic mean value)
• limiting value selectable (for noise types Total, Industrial, Roads, Rail-
ways, Airplanes)
• exclusion of non-relevant parts of the facade (i.e. saving calculation
time)
• configurable representation of the building noise map (by storeys or
levels)
• symbol type selectable: octagon or ribbon
• variable symbol size (for satisfying and exceeding facade points sepa-
rately)
• facade level or facade point number displayed
• colored symbols according to the specified color palette
• 3D-Special view: building facades are colored according to the speci-
fied color palette
• map showing facade level differences: When variants for different situ-
ations (e.g. "without" and "with noise barrier") have been calculated,
the level difference between these two variants can be displayed as a
building noise map.

The assessment of the noise load requires besides the level information Population Density
also the number of residents exposed to this level. In CadnaA the number and Noise Load
of residents is an attribute of each residential building. In case no residen-
tial data is available CadnaA estimates these data automatically.
CadnaA-operations with residential data:

• import of residential data via ODBC-connection

• alternatively: automatic estimation of residents per building based on
building data
• calculation of population density in specified areas of land use
• normalization to actual number of inhabitants
By using the command Object-Scan grid maps displaying population den-
sity can be generated.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

464
13.3 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option XL

Grid map on population density

Object-Scan Object-Scan is one of the most powerful tools of CadnaA. This feature is
available with option CadnaA-XL only.

Dialog Object-Scan

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option XL 13.3 465

For the selected type of object, the object-scan feature sums up an arbitrary
attribute value or a calculated attribute value for all objects of that type. By
this tool you are able to calculate, for example:
• length of all roads or railway tracks
• number of residents living in buildings with less than 10 m height
• average height of all buildings
• area of closed polygons (e.g. parking lots, areas of designated land use
...)
• using height points resulting from overflights as building heights
• calculation of noise load figures
• and a lot more ...

Summing up and displaying the resulting values can be arranged in the fol- Kinds of Summation
lowing ways: for Object-Scan

• Single Values: The evaluation refers to the entire project and the resul-
ting value is displayed on a dialog box.
• Specified Areas/Polygons: First, a target object type is selected whose
objects are closed polygons. Furthermore, an attribute of the target
object type has to be selected which the summarized values will be
assigned to.
• Grid and Window Size (side length of a square): The summation
occurs for the existing grid. A scanning window is arranged so that its
pivot is a grid point. For evaluation and summation the entire grid is
run through by shifting the window step by step to the next grid point.
The summarized value is addressed to the respective grid point.
• Table: The scanning results are written into a table containing definable
classes (for day/night separately). This feature enables - for example -
to sum up the residents living in buildings within a specified range of
facade levels just by one scanning procedure.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

466
13.3 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option XL

Map of Conflicts A conflict map illustrates where the limiting value is exceeded as a colored
map. After having entered the respective limiting values for each noise
type and area of designated land use the conflict map can be calculated by
CadnaA in conjunction with the option CadnaA-XL.

Map of Conflicts

The conflict map shown has been generated by comparing the noise levels
calculated with the limiting value for road noise. Depending on the level
range to be displayed the color palette has to be adapted. In the green areas
no conflict occurs as the limiting values are met or even under-run. The le-
gend shows the amount of exceedings in the areas of conflict.
Monetary Assessent The Swiss BUWAL-method for monetary assessment of noise load is inte-
of Noise Load grated in CadnaA (Lit.: Economical Acceptance and Commensurability of
Noise Mitigation Methods, publication No. 301, Ed.: Swiss Agency for
the Environment, Forests and Landscape (SAEFL/BUWAL), 1998 [avai-
lable in German or French]). The method assesses the reduction of rent va-
lue of dwellings exposed to noise. The monetary difference among
different planning alternatives expresses the benefit of noise mitigation
measures in monetary units.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option XL 13.3 467

The following monetary assessments can be handled by CadnaA:

• assessment based on the floor/ground ratio
• assessment for all buildings inside an area of designated land use (as a
summarized single value)
• assessment for all buildings inside in several areas of designated land
use (addressing the resulting value to an attribute in the objects tables)
• assessment using a scanning window and displaying the result as a grid
map
These evaluations are preformed by the CadnaA-commands Grid Evalu-
ation and Object-Scan. The grid map shown below has been generated
using a scanning window of 50 by 50 meters. The decrease of rent value
has been normalized to 1000 m².

Rental Abatement shown as a Grid Map

In the blue and red colored areas the highest decreases of rent value oc-
curs. Additional noise mitigation measures would be worthwhile here soo-
nest. In the yellow and green areas the decrease of rent value is
comparatively small and so are the valorization by further mitigation
measures.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

468
13.3 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option XL

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option SET 13.4 469

13.4 Option SET

By the optional expert system CadnaA-SET sound power spectra can be
automatically generated based on technical system parameters of a sound
source (for example: electric power in kW, volume flow in m3/h, rotations
in 1/min etc.). SET stands for "Sound Emission & Transmission" provi-
ding a unique system to model various kinds of sound sources.
CadnaA-SET comes with about 150 predefined module (sound source de-
scriptions) for technical sound sources (such as electric and combustion
engines, pumps, ventilators, cooling towers, gear boxes etc). The range of
sources and systems can be extended by the user himself. The sound po-
wer spectra calculated by CadnaA-SET can be addressed to point, line or
areas sources after having specified their respective technical parameters.
The main features of CadnaA-SET: Main Features
• calculation of frequency spectra of radiating sound power determined
from the technical parameters of a sound source
• modelling of complex facilities and devices with multiple sound sour-
ces and radiating areas reproducing their inner sound flux (e.g. colling
towers and pipe systems)
• immediately accessible know-how by predefined sound source models
establishing a data pool ready-to-use
• data pool can be easily extended by user-defined sound source models
• inserting a silencer at a location in a sound flux string reduces the emis-
sion of all following radiating areas automatically
• noise mitigation measures can be checked easily regarding their impact
at receiver points by adjusting the technical parameters accordingly
(volume flow, thickness of sheet metal)
• speeds up your project work by reducing the time required for data
retrieval of noise emission data

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

470
13.4 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option SET

SET-Manual The CadnaA-SET manual is a powerful compendium regarding technical

sound sources. Each sound source description consists of:
• one or more pictures
• technical-physical specification
• information for the sound generation mechanisms
• calculation background of each SET-module (name of the SET-
module, applied equations, parameters)
• additional hints regarding possible noise reduction measures and data
on the uncertainty of this procedure
• literature/references specifying the literature, guidelines and standards
applied.

Sound Source Modu- The following sound source modules are delivered with each copy of Cad-
les being delivered naA-SET. By user-defined sound source modules this list can be extended.

• axial fan
• axial fan - casing
• radial fan for roof ventilation
• steam-gas-preheater
• steam-air-jet pump
• decanter
• Diesel engine without silencer
• swirl burner (system KEU/Bayer)
• rotary piston compressor - air cooled
• rotary piston compressor - water cooled
• rotary furnace
• electric motor frequency controlled 1500..3000 min-1
• electric motor frequency controlled 500..1500 min-1
• electric motor (standard) 50 Hz/1000 min-1
• electric motor (water cooled) 50 Hz/1000 min-1
• induct burner
• conveyor - rubber rolls
• conveyor - steel rolls
• screw conveyor (without squeal)
• gears (general).

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option SET 13.4 471

• conveyor pipe for pellets (noise reduced)

• conveyor pipe for pellets (standard)
• granulator
• wet dry cooling towers
• hydraulic motor
• hydraulic pump
• jump in duct cross-section (with guide plate)
• bevel gear
• piston compressor
• condensate pump
• rotary piston compressor
• ball mill
• cooling tower, one side pressurized
• cooling tower two sides pressurized
• air cooler noise-reduced
• air cooler standard
• air-air-jet pump
• membrane pump
• engine - worm gear
• engine - spur gear
• transformer ventilated (noise reduced)
• planetary gear
• propeller pump - pipe casing
• jump in cross-section
• centrifugal fan, baldes curved backwards
• centrifugal fan, baldes curved forwards
• Regavo / Luvo (rotating pre-heaters)
• plunger pump
• ribbed tube heat exchanger
• gas filled pipes
• pipe orifice with flow
• pipe elbow
• rotation washer - engine encapsulated
• rotation washer (standard)
• bag filter pneumatic

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

472
13.4 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option SET

• worm gear
• screw pump
• screw-type compressor
• oscillating conveyor / screen
• separator
• canned motor pump
• feed-water pump
• spur gear
• immersion pump
• moisture eliminator
• T-junction
• turbo-gear box
• turbo-compressors
• heat exchanger
• roots pump
• liquid ring vacuum pumps 1000 min-1
• weather resistant louvre
• toothed belt gear (ET haltig)
• centrifuges
• intercooler

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option FLG 13.5 473

13.5 Option FLG

The option CadnaA-FLG calculates the noise emitted from airports and
landing strips based on the following calculation procedures:
• AzB 1975 - Anleitung zur Berechnung von Lärmschutzbereichen an
zivilen und militärischen Flugplätzen nach dem Gesetz zum Schutz
gegen Fluglärm vom 30. März 1971 (GMBl. Ausg. A, S.125, 1975, in
German)
• AzB 2008 - Verordnung über die Datenerfassung und das Berech-
nungsverfahren für die Festsetzung von Lärmschutzbereichen vom 27.
Dezember 2008 (BGBl. I S. 2980, in German)
• European Civil Aviation Conference Document 29 (ECAC Doc. 29),
„Report on Standard Method of Computing Noise Contours around
Civil Airports“, 2nd edition, 1997 (adopted according to AR-INTE-
RIM-CM „Adaptation and Revision of the Interim Noise Computation
Methods for the Purpose of Strategic Noise Mapping“, March 2003)
• DIN 45684-1 „Acoustics - Determination of aircraft noise exposure at
airfields - Part 1: Calculation method (Sept. 2006, in German)
• ÖAL-Richtlinie Nr. 24, Blatt 1 und 2: Lärmschutzzonen in der Umge-
bung von Flughäfen, Planungs- und Berechnungsgrundlagen (Ed.
2008-03-01, in German).

Noise Protection Areas at an Airport

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

474
13.5 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option FLG

CadnaA-FLG offers, therefore, all aircraft calculation methods applied on

the national German and European level.
CadnaA-FLG can be applied without any restrictions to calculate the noise
protection areas around civil or military airports as legally enforced. This
holds both methods, for AzB 1975 and for the new AzB 2008.
After implementation of the new AzB-method and test calculations with a
prescribed test airport the following additional features are available:
• consideration of emission by taxiing on taxi-ways (besides the runways
and the flight tracks),
• implementation of the so-called „sigma-rule“ accounting for the flight
statistics within the last 10 years,
• consideration of APU-emission with automatic generation at the end of
taxiways using the respective list of aircraft movements,
• import/export of flight track and taxiways data in the QSI-AzB-format
(following DIN 45 687),
• import of DES-data via the ODBC-connection,
• consideration of different take-off and touch-down points on a runway
(by so-called „virtual runways“),
• simultaneous calculation of the evaluation parameters LAeq,Tag,
LAeq,Nacht , and NAT(Lp,Schw) considering the „sigma-rule.
The segmentation procedure described in ECAC Doc. 29 has been
nominated as interim method by the EC-environmental noise directive.
Noise contours for the noise indicators Lden and Lnight can easily be calcu-
lated using the option CadnaA-FLG.
The calculation of aircraft noise with CadnaA-FLG is equivalent to the
calculation for other types of noise like industry, roads, and railways. This
means that in examining the total noise - e.g. for the calculation of noise
maps - the aircraft noise immissions can be seamlessly integrated in the
overall assessment.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option FLG 13.5 475

• fully implemented into the CadnaA-user-interface Main Features of

• freely combinable with all other noise types (industry, roads, railways) Option FLG
• calculation at predefined receiver points and on a grid
• calculation of noise protection areas accord. to AzB 1975 and AzB
2008
• alternative calculation methods ECAC Doc. 29 and DIN 45684-1
• library with predefined aircraft groups (aircraft, helicopters, APUs)
• import of flight traffic data provided by the DES (Data Aquisition
Systems accord. to AzB) via ODBC-connection
• import/export of flight track and taxiways data in the QSI-AzB-format
(following DIN 45 687),
• configurable calculation settings (AzB 75, AzB 08, ECAC, DIN)

• calculation strictly accord. to AzB 1975, alternatively: Configuration

• parameter of half-value switchable q=4 or q=3 AzB 1975
• several procedures for integration of air corridor
• free input of reference time interval
• calculaton result: Leq (La and Lb accord. to AzB) or Ld/Ln (separate
calculation for day and night)
• optionally consideration of receiver height
• maximum level statistics with editable level range and class width
• variation of emission levels for one aircraft group with evaluation of
maximum levels
• calculation of the number of exceedings above a defined threshold

• calculation strictly accord. to AzB 2008, alternatively: Configuration

• editable grid factor AzB 2008
• max. difference of levels for segmentation editable
• definable rules for segmentation of curves
• free input of reference time interval
• definable non-standard reference times D/E/N
• maximum level statistics with editable level range and class width
• calculation of the number of exceedings (NATs) above a defined thres-
hold
• normalizing NATs to 24 hour-interval

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

476
13.5 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option FLG

Configuration • editable grid factor

ECAC • max. difference of levels for segmentation editable
• definable rules for segmentation of curves
• free input of reference time interval
• optional consideration of receiver height
• maximum level statistics with editable level range and class width
• calculation of the number of exceedings above a defined threshold
• normalizing NATs to 24 hour-interval

Configuration • editable grid factor

DIN 45684-1 • max. difference of levels for segmentation editable
• definable rules for segmentation of curves
• free input of reference time interval
• maximum level statistics with editable level range and class width
• variation of emission levels for one aircraft group with evaluation of
maximum levels
• calculation of the number of exceedings above a defined threshold
• normalizing NATs to 24 hour-interval

Configuration • editable grid factor

ÖAL 24 • max. difference of levels for segmentation editable
• definable rules for segmentation of curves
• free input of reference time interval
• optional consideration of receiver height
• maximum level statistics with editable level range and class width
• calculation of the number of exceedings above a defined threshold
• normalizing NATs to 24 hour-interval

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option APL 13.6 477

13.6 Option APL

CadnaA-APL enables the calculation, assessment, and presentation of air
pollutants distribution according to the European guidelines 1999/30/EC
and 2000/69/EC. The results obtained can serve as the basis for action
planning in the context of mitigation plans for air pollution.
CadnaA-APL combines the user-friendly interface of CadnaA with the
calculation model AUSTAL2000 developed by the German Environmen-
tal Protection Agency (UBA). The implemented Lagrange particle model
considers time-dependent emissions from road and industrial sources, va-
riable wind fields and atmospheric stability and accounts for terrain and
buildings.
Using the CadnaA-PCSP-technique (Program Controlled Segmented Pro-
cessing) for full-automatic tiling, project distribution, and processing on a
network the dispersion maps for various air pollutants are calculated for
arbitrary project limits.
.

Distribution of fine particles (PM10) along a main including the buildings

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

478
13.6 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option APL

Main Features The main features of CadnaA-APL are:

• maps showing air pollutants distribution for PM10 (fine particles),
NO2, NOx, benzene, and SO2 and further components
• import of annual or multi-annual statistics of meteorological parame-
ters
• meteorological time series with time dependant emission of point, line
and area sources
• standardized emission factors for road traffic
• utilization of the existing town and terrain model resulting from noise
mapping
• calculation of dispersion of pollutants with high resolution including
the buildings and the terrain
• calculation for large areas using the powerful PCSP-technique (Pro-
gram Controlled Segmented Processing)
• Grid Arithmetics: superposition of immission maps from several types
of emission sources
• Industrial Sources: calculation of plant-specific immission impact in
the vicinity including the thermal boost (also when emitted via cooling
towers)
• calculation of the number of exceedances of the 24-hour limit value for
component PM10 and of the hourly limit value for component NO2
• calculation of concentration of air pollutants at up to 20 monitoring
points with the calculation areat

Emission Factors for The emission factors for road traffic applied by default in CadnaA-APL
Road Traffic result from a joint publication by the German, Swiss, and Austrian Envi-
ronmental Protection Agencies (HBEFA 2.1 - Manual for Emissions Fac-
tors of Road Traffic, February 2004). The emission of a road section
depends on the emission factors, the mean daily traffic densities (MDTD),
the percentage of heavy vehicles, the average speed, and the reference ye-
ar. The average speed relevant for air pollution can be introduced by a text
variable on the Memo-Window. Alternatively, individual emission time
series for specific scenarios can be entered or pasted via the clipboard.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option APL 13.6 479

With CadnaA-APL you can handle the following tasks easily, for examp- Fields of Application
le:
• calculation of air pollutants emission and immission in cities and urban
areas
• prognosis of air pollutants emission and immission to assess mitigation
plans for road traffic
• assessment of measures in the context of noise and air quality mitiga-
tion plans
• prognosis of air pollutants emission and immission by industrial sour-
ces

Examples
When calculating the immission of fine particles by road traffic in urban Road Junction
areas the influence by buildings can be considered by CadnaA-APL. The
local wind fields have on enormous impact on the resulting distribution.
This example shows that the maximum concentrations of fine particles
PM10 are not found in the vicinity of the road crossing, but at of a building
alongside of the most busy road.

Distribution of fine particles PM10

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

480
13.6 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option APL

Highway with CadnaA-APL includes the buildings as well as the terrain into the calcula-
mounds and barrier tion of air pollutants distribution. This examples shows a highway section
with the road surface below the mean terrain level and a housing areas ne-
arby. There is also a barrier on top of the ridge alongside of the highway.
Barriers are taken in account as being as buildings in CadnaA-APL as
AUSTAL2000 does not consider barriers by default. The pictures illustrate
the screening effect by the terrain as well as by the barrier on top.

Influence of a barrier on the NO2-distribution

Truck movements in For modeling of the emission of industrial sources the CadnaA-objects
a gravel pit point, line, and (vertical, horizontal) area sources are used. This example
shows a gravel pit modeled as an area source. The emission time series can
be entered for each daily hour individually and for each pollutant. The cal-
culation considers the influence by the terrain to assess the resulting con-
centrations at the houses in the vicinity.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option APL 13.6 481

Distribution of fine particles PM10

To model industrial sources in CadnaA-APL the objects point, line, and Emission by high
area source (vertical, horizontal) are used. The calculation considers besi- point sources
des the hourly emission rate for each component the additional rise of the
plume due to its thermal lift by entering the following parameters:
• heat flux of the exhaust gas or exhaust temperature
• exhaust velocity
• stack diameter
• liquid water content or relative humidity of the plume (when emitted
via a cooling tower)
The example illustrates the NOx-distribution by three high point sources at
an industrial site. Due to the power plant's building structure the plume is
drawn to the ground on the downwind side. At this location the concentra-
tion increases considerably. The houses in the residential area cause an ac-
cumulation and an expansion of the plume perpendicular to the plume's
axis.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

482
13.6 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option APL

NOx-emissionresulting from three high point sources

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option CALC 13.7 483

13.7 Option CALC

The option CadnaA-Calc enables a cost-saving processing of large noise
mapping projects. This version just consists of the CadnaA-processing
kernel without the user-interface to enter and edit objects. Thus, the option
CadnaA-Calc allows all computers in a network to be used for noise map-
ping calculations and to save precious time - especially when you have just
one licenced CadnaA-program for your project work only.

CadnaA and CadnaA-CALC 5 in a network

CadnaA-Calc is available in 4 levels:

• Calc 5
• Calc 10
• Calc 15
• Calc 20

The main features of CadnaA-Calc: Main Features

• cost-saving solution for high calculation performance in a network

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

484
13.7 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option CALC

• requires at least one licenced CadnaA-program with option CadnaA-

XL-option
• available in 4 levels: for 5, 10, 15 or 20 additional computers
• applies the PCSP-technique (Program Controlled Segmented Proces-
sing)
With CadnaA-Calc installed all office computers are available for noise
mapping calculations off-time.

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option 64-Bit 13.8 485

13.8 Option 64-Bit

Calculation of large-scale projects as well as of very detailed projects is li-
mited within 32-bit software by a maximum 2GB addressable main me-
mory. But, with CadnaA 64-bit opption this limitation exists no longer!
Option 64 increases the processable total data volume by a factor of
4,000,000,000. Even noise maps of entire countries or large-area 1m grids
can be calculated very fast and conveniently.
Support of up to 64GB RAM leads to an enormous performance improve-
ment. Extensive calculations and analysis now can be done in a single run
instead of one by one as this is the case with 32-bit software. This is pos-
sible because CadnaA 64-bit handles even with large amount of data (e.g.
terrain model, all buildings, detailed grids) within a single project file. Par-
titioning of the project, calculation of overlaps and consolidation of the
calculated sections is not necessary anymore. Project handling becomes,
therefore, much more efficient, timesaving and simple.

Noise map of an urban area

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

486
13.8 Chapter 13 - CadnaA-Options
Option 64-Bit

Since most notably large-scale and complex projects can benefit from
using the CadnaA 64-bit option, a hardware configuration with 4 GB or
more memory is recommended. Requirements are a processor with 64-bit
extension (x86-64, EM64T, Intel64, AMD64) as well as a 64-bit Windows
operating system.

Main Features The main features of CadnaA 64-Bit:

• enormous performance improvement due to support of up to 64GB
RAM
• extensive calculations and analysis in a single run instead of one by
one as this is the case with 32-bit software
• significantly more efficient and more timesaving handling of large-
scale projects
• detailed calculation e.g. with 1m grids
• increased calculation speed

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Index 487

Index

A assign automatically 163

change symbol size 161
absolute coordinates 59 define height of storeys 160
activation 421 select type of land use 159
additional width (appearance) 235 table 161
additional width s. road, self-screening building evaluation & building noise map 157
addressing building evaluation symbol 158
limiting values 118 building noise map 157, 168
numbers of trains 288 edit result table 171
Aladdin Admin Control Center 27 building radiation 177
allocation of hours 115 generate building 185
area of land use 159 interior level & transmission loss 181
limiting value 118 object snap 178
areas of equal sound level 141 snap radius 178
assign object attributes s. ODBC-import strip window 183
auralisation 272 vertical area source 178
A-weighted PWL 107
C
B
CadnaA-options
bitmap-import 301 64-Bit 485
calibrate 301 APL 477
geo-referencing 311 BMP 455
reference points 302, 307 BPL 459
RMS-error/standard deviation 308 CALC 483
scaling bar 302 FLG 473
break SET 469
areas 447 XL 461
into pieces (line-like objects) 395 calc width of roads 247
lines 445 calculation protocol 112, 127, 133
bridge 257 change color 374
building evaluation change dimensions 67
check box 47

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

488 Index

chimney’s cylinder s. stacks and chimneys copying

chimney’s mouth s. stacks and chimneys individual objects 73
clipboard within the graphic 73
copy to 74 correction Cmet 219
Cmet 219 correction for multiple reflections 246
combo box 47 correction for operating time 114
scale 95 cross section 441
condition s. modify objects
configuration D
allocation of hours 115
railroad 280, 281 decimal separator 91
connect lines delete
check ID 398 data record 100
snap radius 398 objects 79
context menu 433 dialog box
3D-special 443 building noise map 168
break areas 447 layer 187
break into pieces (line-like objects) 395 dialog options
break lines 445 ID 85
convert to 401 info 85
cross section 441 name 85
deleting objects 79 ObjectTree 85
duplicating objects 377 different emission Day/Evening/Night 123
edit 437 directivity 195
fit DGM to object 427 pre-defined 196
fit object to DTM 431 table 198
force rectangle 381 user-defined 198
modify objects 361, 439 directivity index 122, 180
parallel object 417 examples 122
simplify geometry 393 directivity vector 196, 199, 202
specify length 451 directvity
spline 391 frequency-dependant 203
control elements 47 diurnal pattern 243
check box 47 normalizing a 245
list box 47 downwind conditions 219
option button 47 driveways & areas 189
convert to 401 duplicating objects 377

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Index 489

action duplicate 379 save as 53

DXF-import 317 force rectangle 381
example 317 frequencies of wind 224
layer 318
G
E
generate building 185
edit generate rays 110
object edit dialog 83, 437 generate stations 253
search 93 geo-referencing 311
edit dialog GoogleEarth
ID 86 geo-referencing 311
ObjectTree 87 grid
edit mode 61 receiver spacing 153
edit result table 171 save 147
editing objects 81 grid appearance 141, 153
effect grid arithmetics 148
of air absorption 110 calculate difference grid 150
of distance 110 grid calculation
effect of color classes and colors 145
ground absorption 120 displaying grid points & grid values 146
emission as spectrum 138 example 142
emission level Lm,E 241, 278 interpolation 143
emission value as A-weighted PWL 107 lower/upper limit/class width 144
example progressive colors 145
groups 338 specifications 140
meteorology 225 ground absorption 213
moving point source 190 ground absorption area
ObjectTree 345 absorbing 216
ODBC-import 327, 331 reflecting 215
expression s. group ground factor 213
ground height
F change with attribute 372
group
façade level 157 example 338
file expression 337, 342, 357
new 53 objects associated 337

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

490 Index

partial level 338 ISO 9613-2 105

possible actions 337
L
H
land use s. type of land use
horizontal grid 139 lateral diffraction 125
hyperlink 87 left mouse button 45
lines of equal sound level 141
I list „Number of Trains“
creating a 285
icon bar 37 list box 47
icons 36 list train numbers
ID 86 addressing 288
image source method 128 import 286
import local list „Number of Trains“ 278
bitmap 301
DXF 317 M
from MS-Access 327
from MS-Excel 327 marker size 62
ODBC 327 MDTD 242
SHP 321 meteorology 219
importing numbers of trains 286 Cmet 219
industrial sources correction based on C0 221
directivity 195 deviating nord direction 228
driveways & areas 189 example 225
ground absorption 213 wind statistics 224
meteorology 219 miscellaneous
stacks and chimneys 205 decimal separator 91
INI-files 24 modes of calculation
installation 23 building evaluation 157
Aladdin Admin Control Center 27 building noise map 157
CadnaA 23 horizontal grid 139
dongle-driver 23 receiver point 103
INI-files 24 vertical grid 153
remark on updates 24 modify attribute 371
V2C-file 27 change color 374
interior level & transmission loss 181 change ground height with attribute 372

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Index 491

modify objects 361 example 190

actions 362 Multiple Monitors 20
activated or deactivated objects 363 multiple selections 45
activation 421
all 363 N
break into pieces 395
condition 364 noise maps 139
connect lines 397
convert to 401 O
delete 369
delete duplicates 425 object edit dialog 83, 437
fit DGM to object 427 object snap 178
fit object to DTM 431 objects 55
force rectangle 381 copying 73
force right angles 383 delete 79
generate building evaluation 409 duplicate 377
generate floors 415 edit objects (edit mode) 61
generate rails 403 insert objects 55
generate station 405 modify objects 361
label 411 rotating 71
modify attribute 371 tables 99
modify order of points 387 ObjectTree 345
object snap 385 assigning objects 349
objects in a group 363 automatic assignment 349
parallel object 417 define 348
range 363 edit dialog 87
several objects 363 example 345
simplify geometry 393 table partial level 352
spline 391 table sound power level 352
swap name/ID 423 ODBC interface 327
transformation,transformation 399 ODBC-import 327
Monitor, multiple 20 assign object attributes 329
mouse buttons 45 example 327, 331
click with left button 45 named range 327
click with right button 46 range of cells 328
double-click with left button 45 select file 328
moving point source 189 Open Object Table 41

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

492 Index

operating time moving a 63

reference times 115 polygon point mode 63, 64
operating time correction 114 positioning method
option insertion of points 57
64-Bit 485 polygons and lines 57
APL 477 text boxes and zoom 58
BMP 455 protocol of calculation 133
BPL 459
CALC 483 R
FLG 473
SET 469 railroad
XL 461 creating a train list 285
option "Generate Rays" 110 editing geometry 277
option button 47 emission level Lm,E 278
options local train list 278
icon bar 37 on bridge 291
options menu railway correction 281
decimal separator 91 range of cells s. ODBC-import
oversampling grid 141 range s. modify objects
raster with oversampling 141
P ray paths
screening 124
parallel buildings s. road receiver
parallel object 417 generate rays 110
barrier along road 253 partial levels list 134
between defined station marks 407 protocol 112
parallel track 280 receiver height 140
partial level 338 receiver point 103
partial levels list 134 receiver spacing 140, 153
pass-by level 269 record video s. pass-by level
auralisation 272 reference points 302, 307
record video reference times 115
point source, moving 189 reflection 128
polar 59 reflective properties
polygon point barrier 130
adding a 64 relative coordinates 59
deleting a 64 relocating objects 69

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

 Index 493

RLS90 233 SCS s. standard cross section

road search 93
additional width (appearance) 235 segment length 58
calc road width 247 Select Object Type 39
elevated 257 selecting one row 45
emission 241 selecting several consecutive rows 45
emission level Lm,E 241 self-screening 257, 291
geometry 233 stations (parapet) 295
gradient 245 sequence of layers 187
MDTD 242 shape-file s. import SHP
multiple reflections 246 SHP-import 321
parallel buildings 246 example 321
pass-by level 269 layer 321
road width 234 transform attributes
self-screening 257 transform attributes 323
standard cross section 234 unknown attributes 322
stations 253 sound propagation accord. to ISO 9613-2 105
variable lateral slope 237 spline 391
variable width 236 stacks and chimneys 205
wall optimization 265 standard cross section 234
with parallel barrier 251 status bar 36
road gradient 245
road width 234 T
rotating objects 71
table
S delete data record 100
directivity 198
save as 53 variant 355
save settings 49 table groups 337
scale tables 99
combo box 95 toolbox 39
zoom - 96 Open Object Table 41
zoom + 96 Select Object Type 39
Schall03 277 type of land use 159
screening 124
lateral diffraction 125
screens, multiple 20

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA

494 Index

U
unknown attributes 322

V
V2C-file 27, 29
variant
toggle 357
variants 355
example
example
variants 355
vertical area source 178
z-extend 179
vertical grid 153
3D-special view 155

W
wall optimization 265
width s. road width
wind direction s. meteorology
wind frequencies 224
wind speed s. meteorology
wind statistics 224

Z
z-extent 179
zoom - 96
zoom + 96

Manual - Introduction to CadnaA